Home
        KYOCERA FS-1300D
         Contents
1.                     241  RWER F      Read Write External Resource  Format external media 242  RWER I      Read Write External Resource  automatically print partition Information     243  RWER L      Read Write External Resource  print partition List 244  RWER         Read Write External Resource  Read data from external media       245  RWER S      Read Write External Resource  Store TrueType font 246  RWER T      Read Write External Resource  set Terminate string 248  RWER W      Read Write External Resource  Write data to external media                          249  RWRE D      Read Write Resource File  Delete data on external device                       251  RWRF         Read Write Resource File  Format external device 252  RWRE L      Read Write Resource File  print resource file List 253  RWRF P      Read Write Resource File  set hidden file 254  RWRF         Read Write Resource File  Read 255       Contents   iii    Contents   iv       RWRF T      Read Write Resource File  set Terminate string  RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  API program   RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  font    RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  macro   RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  printable data   SATU     adjust SATUration level        ccc             SBM     Set Bottom Margin  SCAP     Set line CAP       SCCS     Save Current Code Set       SCF     Save
2.                    Font Automatic changes  mode   Character   Line Fixed or   Portrait or  spacing   spacing   proportional   landscape  0  1 Yes  2 Yes  3 Yes Yes  4 Yes  5 Yes Yes  6 Yes Yes  7 Yes Yes Yes  8 Yes  9 Yes Yes  10 Yes Yes                   119       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    120    File                                                                                  Automatic changes  Font        mode   Character   Line Fixedor   Portraitor  spacing   spacing   proportional   landscape  11 Yes Yes Yes  12 Yes Yes  13 Yes Yes Yes  14 Yes Yes Yes  15 Yes Yes Yes Yes  Default Font Modes  Emulation mode Font   Printer   s action when font is changed  mode  0  Line Printer  15 Adjusts page orientation  character  spacing  line spacing   1           24    or 0 Does not adjust anything   2  Diablo 630   5  Epson LQ 850   6  HP LaserJet  13 Adjusts page orientation and charac   8  KC GL  ter spacing  Does not adjust line  spacing         RES  SLM 1  STM 2   FTMD 5   CMNT Character spacing is automatically adjusted at each  font change  but line spacing and page orientation are left  alone   UNIT C  SLS 1   BOX  5    5  MRP 1  0  FONT 47   TEXT  Font 47  correctly spaced at 16 6 cpi   N   BOX  5    5  MRP 1  0  FONT 37   TEXT  Font 37  correctly spaced at 10 cpi   N   BOX  5      5         1  0  FONT 52   TEXT  Font 52  proportionally spaced   N   BOX 5      5         1 1    1  FONT 26   CMNT Landscape font in portrait orientation   TEXT        lt  gt  lt  gt  lt 
3.                  NENNEN 02 cm       SPL    SPL     Set Page Length    Format    SPL length     Parameter    length     Function    File    distance from top margin to bottom margin    The SPL command sets the bottom margin  as measured from the top margin position in  the unit value designated by the UNIT command     If an attempt is made to print below the bottom margin  the characters are printed on the  next page     A page length setting in a document file should be placed at the beginning of the file or at  a page break     The SBM  Set Bottom Margin  and SLPP  Set Lines Per Page  commands also set the  bottom margin           RES  UNIT C    SFNT  TimesNewRoman     STM 1  SLS 1  SPL 10    EXIT  E    Top margin at 1 cm  with 10 cm page length   Line 1   Line 2   Line             Line  Line  Line  Line         I         4 CO    Line  Line 9  Line 10  Line 11  Line 12  IR  PAGE  EXIT                    319       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    320    Printout       Top margin at 1 cm  with 10 cm page length   Line 1     Line 2  Line 3  Line 11  Line 4  Line 12  Line 5  Line 6  Line 7  Line 8  Line 9    Line 10       SPO    SPO     Set Page Orientation    Format   SPO orientation   Parameter  orientation    P   portrait  upright    L   landscape  lengthwise   Function    The SPO command instructs the printing system how to orient the page  laying text and  graphics on the page in a vertical direction  portrait orientation  or a horizontal direction   landscape orientation    
4.                 UJ UJ tU UO UU UJ tU tO UJ tJ tB  C9  CO  CY 52  ED                             DD DD D gt  DD DD    MZP 2  4  SFNT  TimesNewRoman  48  TEXT  HOLIDAYS             PAGE  EXIT              Printout    MAUI   999 HOLIDAYS     22       ALTF    ALTF     change to ALTernate Font    Format    ALTF alternate number      Parameter    Function    alternate number  a number from 0 to 47    The ALTF command changes the current font to a font designated by an alternate  number  The actual font assigned to this alternate number is set by a previous SETF  command     The alternate number can be a bitmap font number or a number specifically assigned to  the scalable font using the SFNT command  See File on the next page      If no font has been assigned to the specified alternate number  the ALTF command has  no effect  the font does not change     The ALTF command enables you to prepare a document using several fonts  without  deciding in advance which specific fonts to use  For example  you could use ALTF 1 to  designate plain text and ALTF 2 to designate italics  and allow the specific size and style  of type to be determined by SETF commands at a later time     23       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    24    File    Printout    IR  RES    SFNT  Helvetica Nr   12  1000   SFNT  TimesNewRoman It   11  1001   SETF 1  1000    SETF 2  1001    MCRO BIBLIO                                                                             ALTF 1  TEXT 51  E  TEXT      E   ALTF 2  TEXT  2  
5.        Parameter  terminator   ASCII text string up to 4 bytes  enclosed in either single or double quotation marks  Function    The RWER T command sets a terminator string for external media whether it is a  memory card or the hard disk  This terminator is used when storing binary data to  external media  See the RWER S command page  page 246  for example  WRED is set  as the default terminator if parameter terminator is omitted     A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used        RWERW    RWER W      Read Write External Resource  Write    Format    data to external media       RWER     medium  data type     partition name    1     Parameters    medium     data type     0   hard disk or RAM disk       memory card    1   Font data   2   Printable data   16   Macro data   112   File data   128   API data  downloadable program     partition name     Function    Name of partition to which data is written  in a maximum of 15 printable ASCII  characters  If this parameter is omitted the printing system will automatically determine  the partition name     The RWER W command writes data to any external media whether it is a memory card  or the hard disk     Although all data types may be written up to the amount allowed by the storage size of  the given media  note carefully that writing beyond this limit will result in data being  interpreted as unneeded     Even if data is written to a device using the same file name  that d
6.       Landscape  SPO L         Portrait  SPO P      presentation mode   1    The orientation of the logical page determines the width and height of the raster image   The current position also depends on the current page orientation     Current point  Width    Current point  Width       Landscape  SPO L      Portrait  SPO P          R  SPO L  SRO 0  STR 75   RVRD   2 A 0  2 GG0  2  5 lt   2    gt    2  S    2 GG0  2    0  ENDR   PAGE    EXIT                 SROP    SROP     Set Raster OPeration                Format  SROP value   Parameter  value   logical operation value  0 to 255  Function  The SROP command applies logical functions  AND  OR  XOR  NOT  to source   texture  and destination  Possible logical operations provided by this command is 255   These logical operations directory map to their raster operations  ROP3    Logical operation value is eset to the default of 252 by the RES command  An error  results and this command has no effect if the ROP3 value is outside the range 0 to 255   File  IRI  DAM   RES   CRO DBOX   NEWP   PMRP 0 0   PDRP 0 5 0   PDRP 0 0 5   PDRP  0 5 0   CLSP   SROP 252   GPAT 0   FILL   NEWP   PMRP 0 2 0 2   PDRP 0 5 0   PDRP 0 0 5   PDRP  0 5 0   CLSP   SROP  1   PAT 25   FILL   RP 0 8   0 2   ENDM   CRO TROP   ZP0 2        CALL DBOX  0   CALL DBOX  1     331       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CALL DBOX 2   CALL DBOX 3                       RES  EXIT           Printout       332       SSTK    SSTK     select Sorter STacKer    Format   SSTK 
7.      Function    The RWRF W command writes data to an external device such as the hard disk    The number of writable files  which is not limited  depends on the capacity of the  external media  If the device runs out of free space during saving  the remaining data will  be discarded    Duplicating a file name causes the system to rename the specified one and save data   without overwriting data      Example     Write and register prescribe macro  TEST         IR           W 0   MCR    PRE    TEST    test macro     Macro  Data  WRED  EXIT                       Write and register the PCL macro  macro ID  1111                     W 0   MCR    PCL   1111   test macro    Macro  Data  WRED  EXIT                 RWRFW    RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data  to external device  printable data     Format   RWRF W  medium   PRN    file name    Parameters  medium    0   hard disk   A   memory card  file name    ASCII text string up to 15 bytes   Automatically set by the system if omitted   Function    The RWRF W command writes data to an external device such as the hard disk    The number of writable files  which is not limited  depends on the capacity of the  external media  If the device runs out of free space during saving  the remaining data will  be discarded    Duplicating a file name causes the system to rename the specified one and save data   without overwriting data      As described in the example below  add the string  WRED  to the end of the file name     Exam
8.      If the printer receives an ASTK command or one of the FRPO commands  the MID  command is canceled  the output pages will be sorted in the normal sorter mode  and you  must reselect the tray group by specifying the MID command     The MID command is ignored while the multiple environment mode is interface specific   FRPO SO  2   or off  FRPO SO  0    Refer to the sorter s User s Manual     This command is irrelevant to certain combination of photocopier models and option fin   isher models                 Note   File  To enable the multiple user mode  FRPO SO  1    to create three groups  to select the  second group  and to deliver outputs in the fourth tray in the  second  group  send the  following command sequence                  SO  1  ASTK 2  5  MID 2  SSTK 2  EXIT   This page must be delivered to the 4th tray in the sorter         RES  EXIT    Related Commands    ASTK  CSTK  MSTK  SSTK       MPSS    MPSS     e MPS Storage    Format  MPSS  job type       limit     size    Parameters   job type   CODE   temporary or permanent job  VMB   virtual mailbox job  JOBR   retention job   limit   TEMPLIMITSIZE   Limit of the capacity for temporary stored jobs  PERMLIMITSIZE   Limit of the capacity for permanent stored jobs  VMBLIMITSIZE   Limit of the capacity for virtual mailbox jobs  QUICKLIMITCOUNT   Limit of the number of Quick Copy jobs   size   number from 0 to 9999 in unit of megabytes  number from 1 to 50 for QUICKLIMITCOUNT   Function  The MPSS command is used to all
9.      This command is irrelevant to paper cassettes and envelope feeders     The paper orientation setting is restored to the default orientation  FRPO T8  when the  printing system receives the RES command        FILL    FILL     FILL closed path    Format    FILL rule     Parameter    rule     Function    drawing rule     1   use even odd rule  2   use non zero winding number rule    The FILL command fills the area enclosed by the current path with the current drawing  rule  It also fills all independent subpaths contained in a path  An open subpath is  implicitly closed before being painted  as done by a CLSP command   This command  clears the current path after filling and moves the cursor to the end of that path     With drawing rule 1  even odd  whether or not a point is deemed to be inside the path is  determined by drawing a ray from that point in any direction and counting the number of  times the ray crosses segments of the path  The point is deemed to be inside the path if  the result is an odd number  if the result is an even number  the point is deemed to be  outside the path     The non zero winding rule also draws a ray from a point in any direction to determine  whether or not that point is deemed to be inside the path and examines the points at  which a segment of the path crosses the ray  However  it then starts counting from zero  and adds one each time a segment in the path crosses the ray from left to right  and  subtract one each time a segment in the pat
10.     378          XBCP 14     enable addressee ID  XBCP 15     enable file size    379  380          XBCP 16     enable checksum  XBCP 17     allow control of file ID    381  382       384       XBCP 18     enable Macro PDF417 symbol mode  XBCP 19     position symbols at the specified locations    386       XBUF     define a BUFfer name    390          XPAT     generate eXpanded fill PATtern    392    Index   1    Contents   v    Contents   vi       PRESCRIBE Command Reference       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    1  Overview of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function    The tables in this section list all the printing system commands supported by the various  models  Support for certain commands varies depending on the printing system model     Access Commands    These commands provide access in and out of PRESCRIBE mode                 Command Function Page  EXIT EXIT from PRESCRIBE mode 99  IR  PRESCRIBE start sequence 214  SCRC Set Command Recognition Character 278       Print System Setting Commands    These commands establish general printing environment parameters                                                                                   Command Function Page  COPY set number of COPIES 61  EPL select EcoPrint Level 98  FDIR MP tray Feed DIRection 100  FRPO Firmware RePrOgram 112  FRPO INIT FRPO INITialize 114  MDAT set MeDia type ATtribute 162  MTYP select Media TYPe 171  OTRY select paper Output TRaY 176  PSRC select Paper SouRCe 212  RCLT Rotated CoLlaTion 216  RES RESet
11.     Function    File    Printout    character code after conversion  1 byte code   0 to 255  2 byte code   0 to 65533  or in  hexadecimal notation   xxxx      The ALTB C command converts the character code given as source character to the  character code given as target character in the user defined character table     If the character table having the identical number already exists  the existing character  table is replaced by the new character table     In the example below  the character table number 56535 is generated by ALTB G  in  which the character       backslash  character code 92   is replaced with the Euro  currency symbol    a  character code 186 for Roman 9 symbol set                 SFNT  TimesNewRoman   14    CSET 4U  CMNT Roman 9    ALTB G  56535  1    ALTB C  56535  92  186    ALTB A  56535    TEXT  The Euro currency is symbolized as       ALTB R  56535  CMNT Release user table    PAGE  EXIT                       The Euro currency is symbolized as            PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ALTB D      ALlocate TaBle  Delete user defined    Format  ALTB D  table id   Parameter  table id   number identifying the character table  from 1 to 65535  to be deleted  Function  The ALTB D command deletes the character table defined by the user   If the table to be deleted is currently allocated to the resident font  see ALTB A    terminate the allocation by using ALTB R before deleting  It is possible to delete all user   defined character tables at once by using ALTB
12.     Parameters    presentation mode     width     height     Function    0   physical raster direction  1   logical page direction    width of raster area in dot  min  1 to max  4200 dots    height of raster area in dot  min  1 to max  4200 dots    The SRO command specifies the presentation mode which defines the orientation of the  raster image  If the presentation mode is 0  default   the printing system creates the raster  image along the width of the physical page regardless of the current page orientation   With the presentation mode 1  however  the raster graphics prints in the orientation of  the logical page  Presentation modes 0 and 1 are depicted in the next page     The width and height options define the size of the raster area which has the current  position as its left top corner of the area  These options are measured in the dot unit  regardless of the current designation of the UNIT command     Raster data extending beyond the border along the width of the raster area is clipped in  the increment of dot     After a RVRD command sequence finishes  the current position is moved down by 1 300  inch     329       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    330    File    presentation mode   0    The width and height of the raster area are defined based on the physical page regardless  of the current page orientation  The current page orientation affects the position of the  current point  however     X  Current point    Width  e    Height ue    Current point     lt            
13.    A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used     This command causes a page break and prints a format information page  if the medium  is a compact flash card  when executed        RWERI    RWER        Read Write External Resource   automatically print partition Information    Format    RWER I  mode        Parameter    mode   control mode     E   Enable automatic printing of partition information  D   Disable automatic printing of partition information    Function    The RWER I command toggles the automatic printing of partition lists for any external  media whether it is a memory card or the hard disk  With the automatic printing of  partition lists enabled  RWER I  E    the printing system prints partition lists whenever  data are written to external media     The setting made with this command returns to default when the power is turned off     A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used     243       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWER L      Read Write External Resource  print    244    partition List    Format    RWER L   medium         Parameter    medium     0   hard disk or RAM disk  A   memory card  E   EPROM    Function    The RWER L command explicitly prints partition lists for any external media whether it  is a memory card  the hard disk  or the RAM disk  The lists of partitions for all external  media can be printed by omitting parameter medium     Di
14.    ALTB T    ALTB T      ALlocate TaBle  define combined  character by Table    Format   ALTB T  character code  width  height  x coordinate  y coordinate   Parameters  code     character code for which the combined character is defined  or hexadecimal notation    xxxx   JIS code    width     character width  the value from 1 to the character width specified by ALTB S   page 20     height   character height  the value from 1 to the character height specified by ALTB S   page 20     x coordinate   X coordinate of the reference point  integer value calculated in 1000 unit basis    y coordinate   Y coordinate of the reference point  integer value calculated in 1000 unit basis    Function    This command defines the region in which to store the combination of characters within  coordinates  0  0  to  1000  1000  by specifying a rectangular area and reference point  for the characters  There are no restrictions on the number of characters to be combined     Example     Y  1000  1000      0  0     21       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File   IR  res  unit c    SFNT  TimesNewRoman   48   LTB G  1000  1     1000    1000  64  1800  1000    77   00  700  0  700                     695   700  630  700  CMNT A     85  700  700  1050  700  CMNT U   Ti Sep 00  700  1570  700  CMNT I     36  700  700  0  0  CMNT        57  700  700  400  0  CMNT 9      57  700  700  800  0  CMNT 9      57  700  700  1200  0  CMNT 9           gt                                                              
15.    DUN 16  Distribution Unit Number  EAN   15   MSI with no check digit   16   MSI with single mod 10 check digit   17   MSI mod 10 followed by mod 10 check digit  18   MSI mod 11 followed by mod 10 check digit  19   CODE 39 with no check digit   20   CODE 39 with mod 43 check digit   21   Interleaved two of five with no check digit  22  Identicon two of five with no checksum   23 z Code 128  manual mode change    24   Code 128  auto mode change    25   Code 11 with only    c      26   Code 11 with both    c    and    k    checksum  27   Code 93 with both  c  and          checksum  28   CODABAR with no check digit  narrow gap   29 z Matrix two of five with no checksum   31   Industrial two of five with no checksum   32   Ames with no checksum   33   Delta distance    a     IBM  with no checksum  34   Delta distance    a     IBM  with no checksum  35   EAN 8 with two digit supplement   36   EAN 8 with five digit supplement   37   EAN 13 with two digit supplement   38   EAN 13 with five digit supplement   39   POSTNET   40   FIM   41   Interleaved two of five with check digit   42   UPC EAN128          BARC    43   CUSTOM CODE  Japan    44   CODABAR with no check digit  wide gap     flag   Y   Print the string under the barcode  N   Do not print the string    string   Text to be converted to a barcode  The text must be enclosed with single or double quote  marks     short     Height of short bars in barcode types that have bars in two different heights  Height of all  bars in o
16.    ENDB              XBAR PDF 1    MRP 1 1    XBAR PDF 2    The sixth line prints PDF417 barcode containing the data string buffered in the third line  and the last line prints PDF417 barcode containing the data string buffered in the fourth  line     XBCP  XBUF  XBUF                          DF 1  25  This is    PDF417 example   ENDB   DF 2  15  This is a test   ENDB                  TAJ       CRO PDF   XBAR PDF 1   RP 17 15  XBAR PDF 2   ENDM   CALL PDF    The last line prints the two PDF417 barcodes defined in the macro which is defined by  MCRO in the sixth line                 391       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XPAT     generate eXpanded fill PATtern    392    Format    XPAT pattern number  bitmap     Parameters    pattern number   number from 100 to 105                      bitmap   dot pattern of the pattern  coded as a character string   Function  The XPAT command generates a new  expanded shading pattern  The new pattern can be  specified with the PAT command for use by the BLK and ARC commands and in a path   Details for creation of new patterns appear in Chapter 4 of the Technical Reference  manual    File        RES  UNIT            5  5            105          0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0   PAT 105  BOX 4  1  BLK 4  1   PAGE   EXIT    Printout   Related Commands    PAT  BLK  ARC    Index    Numerics  2 dimentional barcode  See Two dimentional barcode  362    A  Absolute position  73  157  Alternate font  assigning  287  API  241  Ar
17.    Heavy    Function    The MDAT command is used to customize the default attributes of a media type for  optimization  The paper weight attribute affects the printing system   s transfer bias   fuser mode affects the fuser temperature  and duplex determines whether the paper with  that paper type is allowed for duplex printing or not     If the parameters paper weight and fuser mode are omitted  this command resets the  three attributes back to their defaults  If all the parameter are omitted  MDAT    all the  attributes for the all media types are reset to the default     File    To set the transparency paper type to the thick paper weight and the high fuser  temperature mode  disabling the duplex printing  command     IR  MDAT 2  1  0  1  EXIT        Related Command    MTYP    163       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MID     Muiti tray ID    164    Format    MID tray group     Parameter    tray group     Function    number from 1  top  to the maximum    The MID command selects a group of trays in the sorter  which is assigned by the ASTK  command and allows the subsequent SSTK  select Sorter STacKer  or CSTK  select  Collator STacKer  command to deliver the output pages into the trays of that group for  sorting or collating     The MID command should be placed at the beginning of a file or program  or at the top  of a new page  The selection of a tray group made by the MID command is effective until  it is changed by another MID command  It is not reset by the RES command 
18.    RWRFT      Read Write Resource File  set    256    Terminate string    Format    RWRE          terminator          Parameters    terminator     ASCII text string up to 4 bytes  Set to default  WRED  if omitted     Function    The RWRF T command changes a terminator  default  WRED     The terminator that was changed with this command is also available for the LAPI  command to load the API program    Turning the power on again will return the changed terminator to  WRED      Example     Change the terminator to  TEST         IR  RWRF T    TEST   EXIT                 RWRFW    RWRF W       Read Write Resource File  Write data  to external device  API program     Format               medium   API    program type   prescribe command name  API   program start function name                      Parameters   medium     0   hard disk  A   memory card    program type      PRE  prescribe command    prescribe command name   ASCII text string up to 4 bytes    API program start function name     ASCII text string up to 31 bytes  Cannot be omitted     file name   ASCII text string up to 15 bytes  Automatically set by the system if omitted     Function    The RWRF W command writes data to an external device such as the hard disk    The number of writable files  which is not limited  depends on the capacity of the  external media  If the device runs out of free space during saving  the remaining data will  be discarded    Duplicating a file name causes the system to rename the specified one
19.    Sales   0  0   Invoice    Sales    01 14 02  16 30 25       UNIT C  MZP 5  10  BOX 6  6  PAGE  TEXT  November Result    PAGE  TEXT  To Mr  Johnson   PAGE    JOBT  EXIT                                      To stack the jobs between JOBS and JOBT on all virtual  mailboxes having numbers 3 to 15           JOBS    R  JOBS 8  3  3  15  0   Service    Repair    01 14 02  16 30 25       UNIT     MZP 5  10  BOX 6  6  PAGE   TEXT  Domestic   PAGE    JOBT  EXIT                   EXT  ABCDE   PAG          Gl                143       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBT     JOB Terminate    144    Format    JOBT     Parameter    Function    File    None    The JOBT command terminates defining a job which is started by JOBS  The JOBT  command is used in combination with JOBS to constitute a job definition  The printing  system prints the job in the number of copies as specified by the repeat count  commanded by JOBS or JOBP in the cyclic manner     At execution  the JOBT command starts printing the job including stapling  job  separation  job offset  if the relevant option device is installed      The file below sorts and prints the defined job in 40 copies  The pages between JOBS  and JOBT are output to virtual mailbox number 3  Pages after JOBT are output to the  current physical stack     IR  JOBS 0 40 2 0    EXT  Circulation Slip     PAGE    TEXT  Response Slip    PAGE   JOBT    EXIT                                JOG    JOG     JOG output stacks for separation    Format    JOG     
20.    These commands can be used to check the print data in hexadecimal format for print jobs  with unexpected output              Command Function Page  ENDD END Dump 93  RDMP Received data DuMP 217       External Media Control Commands    If an external storage  such as JEIDA Ver  4 memory card or CompactFlash card  or a  hard disk  is installed in the printing system  the following commands can be used to   write data to or read from it  These commands do not apply to the models that do not   have an external storage                                                                 Command Function Page  RWER D  Read Write External Resource  Delete data on external media 241  RWERF  Read Write External Resource  Format external media 242  RWERI  Read Write External Resource  automatically print partition Infor  243  mation  RWERL  Read Write External Resource  print partition List 244  RWERR  Read Write External Resource  Read data from external media 245  RWER S  Read Write External Resource  Store TrueType font 246  RWER T  Read Write External Resource  set Terminate string 248  RWERW  Read Write External Resource  Write data to external media 249  RWRE D  Read Write Resource File  Delete data on external device 251  RWRE F  Read Write Resource File  Format external device 252  RWRF L  Read Write Resource File  print resource file List 253  RWRF P  Read Write Resource File  set hidden file 254  RWRFR  Read Write Resource File  Read 255  RWRF T  Read Write Resource File  set T
21.   300 dpi        FPAT 3  3  0  0  0  0  0  0     FPAT 0  0  24  60  60  24  0  0              _    2    FPAT 255  0       FPAT 1  1       0  0  0  0  0  0  FPAT 1  2  4  8  16  32  64  128     FPAT 8  8  8  8  8  8  8  8                                                                                                              1  1  1  1  1  255     111       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FRPO     Firmware RePrOgram    112    Format    FRPO parameter  value     Parameters    parameter     value     Function    File    parameter stored in permanent memory    new parameter value    The FRPO command sets the various printing parameters stored in permanent memory   Each parameter is identified by a code consisting of a letter and a numeral  such as P1   Details of the parameters and their values are given in Chapter 6 of the Technical  Reference manual  The FRPO command should be used only when it is necessary to  change a parameter permanently  They are not effective as temporary changes in the  middle of a print job     The FRPO command effects values for interface dependent and non interface dependent  parameters as they appear on the status page  See STAT on page 335    Changes to the  interface dependent parameters will effect the current interface only     Changes made with FRPO commands can be reset to the factory set values by the FRPO  INIT  FRPO INITialize  command  Note that the RES command does not reset those  changes made with the FRPO command     IR    FRPO P1  1
22.   5  45   PARC  10 19  54 45  135   STRK   PAGE  EXIT    Printout    201       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PMRP     in Path  Move to Relative Position    202    Format    PMRP x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate     coordinates as measured from the current cursor position    Function    The PMRP command moves the cursor from its current position to a specified relative  position in a path construction  measured in the unit value designated by the UNIT  command     The coordinates may be positive or negative     File    IR  RES  UNIT C   NEWP   PMZP 5   PDRP 5   PMRP 4   PDRP 5   PAGE   EXIT        52  EILE  1                       C                            Qe  E                    f  Q  8  D       C                             C  E  jam   x            K  Q          gt     28  FILL 1              PMRP    203    pu E E EM RM E D TTE  E MM 3 Doe iu  _     y y  _     99v               gt             Um   ae           55    x      E creme    E x                       Printout  Related Command       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PMZP     in Path  Move to Zero relative Position    204    Format    PMZP x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate     coordinates as measured from left edge limit of the current page    Function    File    The PMZP command moves the cursor to a position in a path construction  specified  relative to the top and left edge limits of the current page  and measured in the units    desi
23.   ALlocate TaBle  Delete user defined character table 16  ALTB E  ALlocate TaBle  End defining combination characters 17  ALTB G  ALlocate TaBle  Generate user defined table 18  ALTB R  ALlocate TaBle  Release user defined character table 19  ALTB S  ALlocate TaBle  Start to define the combination character 20  ALTB T               TaBle  define combined character by Table 21  ALTF change to ALTernate Font 23  ASEN ASsign external characters for FoNt 31          Overview of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function                                                                   Command Function Page  CSET Change symbol SET by symbol set ID 65  DAF Delete All Fonts 71  DELF DELete Font 75  FLST print Font LiST 105  FONT change current FONT 108  FSET change current Font SETting by characteristic 115  FTMD bitmap FonT MoDe 119  INTL InterNaTionaL characters 129  LDFC LoaD Font Character 147  LDEN C generate bitmap character for LoaDing FoNt 149              create header for LoaDing FoNt 151  LDEN S LoaD truetype FoNt 153  RPCS Return to Previous Code Set 225  RPF Return to Previous Font 226  SCCS Save Current Code Set 267  SCF Save Current Font 269  SETF SET alternate Font 287  SFA Set bitmap Font Attributes 289  SENT Select current FoNT by typeface 293  TPRS Text PaRSing 350       Fonts are more fully explained in Chapter 4 of the Technical Reference manual     Cursor Movement Commands    These commands move the cursor to specific positions  Cursor movements can be  established for abs
24.   CMN O power up in the IBM emulation    FRPO P3  2  CMN o change the linefeed action to CR LF   FRPO U6  9  CMN o select the US Legal character set   EXIT    US Legal characters     N  til                               IR  PAGE  EXIT              Printout  US Legal characters     O   q 1        Related Command    FRPO INIT    FRPO    113       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FRPO INIT     FRPO INITialize    Format    FRPO INIT     Parameter    None    Function    The FRPO INIT command resets all FRPO parameters to their original  factory default  values  This reset applies to the interface dependent parameters for the current interface  as well as all non interface dependent parameters  For a list of the factory default values   see Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference manual  The FRPO INIT command causes a  page break     To activate the changes made with the FRPO INIT command  turn the printer power off  then on again or reset the printer using the control panel keys     File                   INIT  EXIT        Printout    Omitted    114       FSET        FSET    change current Font SETting by  characteristic       Format  FSET spacing pitch height style weight typeface    Parameters  spacing   fixed or proportional spacing  followed by a terminator P   0   fixed font  1   proportional font  pitch   pitch in cpi  from 0 44 to 99 99 cpi  ignored in a proportional font   followed by a  terminator H  height   the line to line spacing in points from 0 25 to 999 25  followed by 
25.   EXIT    E      None    When the printing system receives the EXIT command  it exits from the PRESCRIBE  mode and treats the following information as characters to be printed                 If the parameter E is added  EXIT  E   the printing system ignores one carriage   return linefeed immediately following the command     SE       m    cU His    R  RES  SFNT  Helvetica   EXIT   ommands ending in EXIT  leave a gap  n the output    R  CMNT Like this  EXIT   hile commands ending in EXIT  E   R  CMNT Like this  EXIT  E   eave no trace of their presenc xcept  ossibly a shortage of lines on the page   R  PAGE  EXIT                                                                          Commands ending in EXIT  leave a gap  in the output     while commands ending in EXIT  E     leave no trace of their presence except  possibly a shortage of lines on the page     99       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FDIR     MP tray Feed DiRection    100    Format    FDIR direction     Parameter    direction   paper orientation on the MP tray    0   Lengthwise  1   Widthwise    Function    The FDIR command specifies the paper orientation during feeding paper on the MP tray   This is possible when the paper is A4 or letter or BS size although this depends on the  printing system model     This command is enabled only when the MP tray s operational mode is cassette or  manual feed  Printing on A4 and letter size paper can only be done widthwise in first  mode    This command causes a page break
26.   Since there are two font headers for Japanese TrueType fonts  the printer automatically  creates a font number increased by 1     name   font name  ASCII text string of up to 31 characters long  This string must be enclosed in  either single or double quotation marks   length   font data length number of bytes sent as binary data  symbol set   font symbol set value  1 to 65535  619   Shift JIS code   style   font style  0 to 32767  stroke   stroke weight     127 to  127  type face   type face  0 to 32767  binary data     font data  in TrueType format     153       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    154    Function    The LDEN S command allows outline fonts  TrueType fonts  to be downloaded to the  printing system  A binary format is used to represent font data  The size of this data must  match that given by length  font data length         Always explicitly terminate font data using WRED    The five bytes represented by  WRED  are not counted as part of the font data length        The maximum number of fonts that can be downloaded is up to the memory available or  256 fonts  512 when format is 2   Use FONT or SENT command to select 1 byte fonts to  be defined with this command     TrueType fonts defined using this command cannot be completely deleted unless both  DELF n  and DELF n 1  are specified     A command error will result and the command has no effect if any of the parameters are  outside the given range  This command is ignored if even one parameter error occurs     A
27.   TEST   EXIT        Set macro file  TEST  in the memory card as a hidden file                          IR  RWRF P   A   MCR     TEST   EXIT        RWRFR    RWRE R      Read Write Resource File  Read       Format   RWER     medium   PRN    partition name     Parameters  medium     0   hard disk  A   memory card    partition name     Function    Name of partition from which data is read  a maximum of 15 printable ASCII characters    The RWRF R command reads data specified by file name from any external media  The  data must be a printable data  When the file name is coexistent in both the hard disk and  memory card that are installed in the printing system  the printing system will read the  memory card first  then the hard disk     The partition name may be a maximum of 15 printable ASCII characters  20H through  7EH   upper and lowercase letters are regarded as distinct  A partition name may not  have leading spaces  and in the command  the partition name must be enclosed in single  or double quotation marks     The printing system will automatically  read or execute the data in the media if it is  stored under the file name of  O2autostart  and saved in the PRE folder of the media  The  printing system will look for the file when it is powered up  The RWER R command is  not required     This command causes a page break     Example     To read partition DataS001 from the hard disk                           0   PRN    DataS001   EXIT     255       PRESCRIBE Command Reference 
28.   When the orientation is changed  the margins are adjusted so that they remain the same  distance from the four edges of the paper  provided cassette paper is being used   See the  illustration     Portrait margins Landscape margins          Right  margin    Bottom  margin    Bottom  margin                         If the printing system cannot adjust the margins as described above  it sets them to the  edge limits  For example  if you set a top portrait margin greater than the paper width   then switch to landscape orientation  the printing system resets the top margin to zero     The printing system uses separate bitmap fonts for portrait and landscape orientations   When the font mode  FTMD  is 8 or higher  as it is in the IBM  Epson  and LaserJet III   4 4 Plus emulations  the printing system automatically sets the correct page orientation  each time a new font is selected  Outside of the FTMD range  the printing system will  not change orientation with a change in fonts  After using the SPO command  remember  to select a font with the new orientation     The orientation can be changed without starting a new page  as in the example below  It  should be noted  however  the printable areas in portrait and landscape orientations are  not symmetrical because the edge limits in each orientation are not identical  See the  Technical Reference manual for details     321       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File    IR  RES   SFNT  TimesNewRoman It   10        CMNT This file is fo
29.   active  and does not change     A total of 45 colors can be specified by name  see list below   These colors must be  spelled as shown  although the letters may be in upper case or lower case     179       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    180    File       Process Yellow    Process Magenta    Process Cyan    Process Black       Process Blue                                     Red 032 Warm Red Rubine Red Rhodamine Red  Blue 072 Reflex Blue Orange 021 Yellow  Green Purple Violet   Black Black 2 Black 3 Black 4  Black 5 Black 6 Black 7   Warm Gray 1 Warm Gray 2 Warm Gray 3 Warm Gray 4  Warm Gray 5 Warm Gray 6 Warm Gray 7 Warm Gray 8  Warm Gray 9 Warm Gray 10 Warm Gray 11   Cool Gray 1 Cool Gray 2 Cool Gray 3 Cool Gray 4  Cool Gray 5 Cool Gray 6 Cool Gray 7 Cool Gray 8  Cool Gray 9 Cool Gray 10 Cool Gray 11       The PANT command may not work with certain printer models and versions  Set the  print quality to Quick mode when this command is used with model FS 5800C     PANTONE colors cannot be used by the PANT command in KPDL emulations           PANT  Cool Gray 1           EXIT        PARC    PARC     in Path  draw ARC    Format  PARC x coordinate  y coordinate  radius  start angle   end angle    Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate     coordinates of the center of arc  measured from the left and top edge limits    radius   radius of arc    start angle   starting angle  measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis    end angle   ending angle  measured counterclockwise 
30.   color mode   0 Monochrome  1   Color  Default     Function    The CMOD command switches between monochrome and color modes   In monochrome mode  other color commands are still enabled  but printing is converted  to monochrome or grayscale     This command causes a page break     60       COPY    COPY     set number of COPIES    Format    COPY number     Parameter    number     Function    File    number of copies    The COPY command designates the number of copies for each page in a print job  This  copy count value can be changed by sending the printing system another COPY  command or by issuing a reset command  For best results  place the copy command near  the start of a job or at the top of a page  If two or more copy commands are placed on the  same page  the last one will be recognized     IR  RES   SLM 0 5   UNIT P   SFNT  Helvetica Bd   14 4   SLS 17   COPY 3   EXIT   Announcement  Party Tonight at 6 00  IR  PAGE  EXIT                    61       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       Announcement  Party Tonight at 6 00          Announcement  Party Tonight at 6 00          Announcement  Party Tonight at 6 00       62       CPAL    CPAL     Control PALette    Format  CPAL mode   palette id     Parameters  mode   palette control mode   A   Delete all palettes  S   Delete all stacked palettes  D   Delete the palette having the specified ID  C   Copy the active palette to the specified ID  palette id   number from 0 to 32767  Default is 0   Function    The CPAL c
31.   delete commands   lt ESC gt  amp f6X or  lt ESC gt  amp   8X  Downloaded macros may also be sent  to specific host buffers of the printer interfaces  The memory card and ROM macros will  be available on all interfaces                                                        RES  FSET 1p12v0s35b245807T    MCRO SIGN    string  length   0 3    SPD  03    BOX  2   3  MRP  15   2    TEXT  1  MRP   15   35    ENDM    CALL SIGN   CHECK ALL SWITCHES AND INDICATORS       3 9   CALL SIGN   BE SAFE  NOT SORRY     2 1    PAGE    EXIT        CHECK ALL SWITCHES AND INDICATORS      BE SAFE  NOT SORRY    161       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MDAT     set MeDia type ATtribute    Format    MDAT  media typel  paper weight  fuser mode  duplex   density        Parameters    media type  1   Plain  2   Transparency  3   Preprinted  4   Label  5   Bond  6   Recycled  7   Vellum  8   Rough  9   Letterhead  10   Color  11   Prepunched  12   Envelope  13   Cardstock  14   Coated  15   Second side  16   Thick  21  Custom 1  22   Custom 2  23   Custom 3  24   Custom 4  25   Custom 5  26   Custom 6  27   Custom 7  28   Custom 8    paper weight  0   Normal  1   Heavy  Thick   2   Light  Thin   3   Extra thick  10   Light  11   Normal 1  12   Normal 2  13   Normal 3  14   Heavy 1  15   Heavy 2  16   Heavy 3  17   Extra heavy    162       MDAT    fuser mode  0   High  1   Middle  2 Low  3   Vellum  duplex  0   Enable  1   Disable    density    1   Light   2   Medium Light  3   Normal   4   Medium Heavy  5
32.   measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  The coordinates may  be positive or negative  Negative coordinates move the cursor outside the margin     The MAP command is ignored in path mode graphics     File                                                                                  MAP    0  MAP 4   MAP 0    MAP 4          IR  RES  UNIT     STM 2  SLM 2   SFNT  Helvetica Nr   9    AP 0  0  BOX 40  40  SPD  2    AP 0  1 4  TEXT     lt        Margins      AP 0  0  CIR  1  EXT  1  EXT    AP 4  0  CIR  1  TEXT  L  TEXT         0  2  CIR  1  EXT  1  EXT    AP 4  2  CIR  1  EXT  L  EXT    AP  1   1  CIR  1  TEXT  L  TEXT  PAGE    EXIT        157       PRESCRIBE Command Reference             Printout  MAP  1   1          D  D  MAP 4  0    lt       Margins         0  2     42   Related Commands    MRP  MZP  MRPA    158       MCLR    MCLR     Match CoLoR    Format  MCLR mode   Parameter  mode   mode of color matching   0   none  default   1   auto  2   vivid color  3   display  Function    The MCLR command selects the mode of color matching     Color matching mode is changed according to the various conditions of emulation  paper  type  and print quality  In monochrome mode  color matching is defaulted to 0  none      Mode 0 does not perform color matching  Mode 1 automatically selects color correction  mode depending on the printing data  Text or vector graphics data are processed using  Vivid Color  raster image data are processed using display mode  Mode 2  Vivid 
33.   number of times  Values are assigned to dummy parameters when the macro is invoked  by the CALL command     If a macro with the same name has already been defined  the new definition is ignored   To redefine a macro  you must first delete the old definition with the DELM  delete  macro  or DAM  delete all macros  command  or by switching power off     See the Technical Reference manual for information on the limitations about the usage of  macros     The PCLSE command language  available in the mode 6 emulation  enables users to  record HPGL 2 macros inside of HPGL 2 commands        File    Printout    MCRO    The following table shows the source of the PCL macros  the location in the printer  and  the property value for the resource     important if resource protection mode is used  See  also Resource Protection in the Technical Reference manual           Macro Location Property  Downloaded          Temporary Permanent  Memory card   Memory card   Permanent   Internal ROM Permanent             The internal printer firmware manages the PCL macros  recognizing the source  location  and property value of the macros     If the printer encounters PCL macros with the same macro ID  it will prioritize them in  the following order  macros downloaded to RAM  macros residing on a memory card   and macros stored in the EPROM     Memory card and EPROM based PCL macros cannot be deleted  Downloaded PCL  macros  available for all FS series printers  may be removed using the PCL reset or
34.  1  to darker  5   default is 3     Function    The TATR command applies a paper source  MP tray or cassette  thickness of paper and  print density  This enables the printing system to optimize the electrical properties  such  as the fuser temperature and the transfer bias  so that the best print quality is achieved  with different thicknesses of paper     The attributes are reset for a tray when thickness and print density parameters are  omitted  All trays are reset when all three parameters are omitted     2  This command is relevant to the FS 1000 printer only     To attribute the MP tray for thick paper and normal density              TATR 0  1  3  EXIT   To reset the second paper cassette  option feeder  to the defaults      IR  TATR 2  EXIT        To reset all paper sources to the defaults               IR  TATR  EXIT        347       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    TEXT     print TEXT    348       Format   TEXT   string        option      U option     Parameters  string    any character string  option    B   Leave cursor at beginning of string   E   Move cursor to end of string   L   Move cursor down one line   N   Move cursor to beginning of next line  U option    Underline text  Function    The TEXT command prints the given string at the cursor location  then moves the cursor  as designated by the option  The string to be printed must be enclosed in either single or  double quotation marks   If the string includes one kind of quotation mark  use the other  kind to en
35.  16  0             130  28  8  0  5  25    130   0  98  OF  5  5  5  5  5  5  5  5  5  5                96       Printout         O1           01     O1    ENDR        PAGE        EXIT                                        ENDR    0  160  96   14  134  6  23  0   192  129  8  16     80  02 51  245 L  136  0    5  48  65  248  32  192   48  5  0  64  144  32  0    07  325  906 264  0 5        bo  20  2128 05      3207 264  OF  5 0  6r 0  1287  07        20      ip 702          05 467       205  20   0    p by 504  20 2 202 55 00 10        97       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    EPL     select EcoPrint Level       Format   EPL level   Parameter  level    0   off   2         Function    The EPL command switches the Ecoprint on or off  default   Ecoprint is a standard  feature of the print systems that enables the user to reduce the amount of toner placed on  the page which saves on printing costs  With EPL 2   the printing image appears lighter   yet remains readable     The following example simulates typical Ecoprint effect        Only one EPL level is possible for a page  If more than one EPL command are put on a  page  the last one is effective     The Ecoprint setting does not effect print speed     File                               RES  SENT  Helvetica Bd   24   SLPI 3   EPL 2  TEXT  Ecoprint is ON     PAGE    EXIT        Sample    Ecoprint is ON                 98       EXIT    EXIT     EXIT from PRESCRIBE mode    Format       Parameter    Function    File    Printout  
36.  216   DRPA 2  0   DRPA 2  288   PAGE   EXIT           DRPA    Printout    83       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    DUPX     select deselect DUPleX mode        Format  DUPX mode   Parameter  mode   a number representing one of the following binding mode   0   simplex mode  1   duplex mode  long edge binding  2   duplex mode  short edge binding  Function  The DUPX command is effective only when the option duplexer is installed to the  printing system  It instructs the printing system to select or deselect duplex printing and  sets the binding mode    1   2   Portrait   short edge  Portrait   long edge   3   Landscape      long ed  PUN  4  Landscape   short edge  File Printout    See DXPG on page 85     84       DXPG    DXPG     select DupleX PaGe side    Format    DXPG side     Parameter    side     Function    a number representing the side of the ensuing page     0   Select next side  the same as form feed   1   Select front side  2   Select back side    The DXPG command is effective only when the option duplexer is installed to the  printing system  It ends printing on the current page in the same manner as a form feed   However  unlike the form feed  it also selects the paper side  front or back  on which  printing of the ensuing page is printed     The side parameter 1 prints the ensuing page begins on the front side of the next sheet   regardless of whether the current page was printed on the front or back side of the current  sheet     The side parameter 2 prints the ens
37.  219  RESL select RESoLution 221  RGST offset ReGiSTration 224  RPU Return to Previous Unit 232  SCSZ Set Custom paper SiZe 281  SCU Save Current Unit 282  SEM Set Emulation Mode 286  SIR Set Image Refinement level 303  SPSZ Set Paper SiZe 323  STAK select paper STAcKer 334  STAT STATus 335  TRSM TRansparency Separate Mode 351  UNIT set UNIT of measurement 351  UOM Unit Of Measurement per dots 354  WIDE set WIDE A4 mode 360          Overview of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function    Page Control  Text  and Comment Commands    The placement commands determine where text will be placed on the page                          Command Function Page  CMNT CoMmeNT 59  CTXT print Centered TeXT 69  PAGE start new PAGE 178  RTTX RoTate TeXt 233  RTXT print Right aligned TeXT 235  TEXT print TEXT 347       Margin and Page Portrait Landscape Orientation  Commands    These commands are used to set the top  bottom  right  and left margins  and to specify  portrait or landscape page orientation  Normal text data is printed inside the margins  but  the TEXT and RTEXT commands can be used to print character strings or graphics  anywhere in the entire printable area of the page  regardless of the margin settings  There  are several commandis for setting margins  so it is possible to select the one that best suits  the purpose at hand  Margin settings can be changed in the middle of a page     Note that the following limitations apply to the margin setting commands         The right margin must be at 
38.  Command Reference    GRAY     represent GRAY    124    Format  GRAY gray mode   Parameter  gray mode   0   represents gray in K  black  default   1   represents gray in CMY  Function    2     Note    The GRAY command determines whether gray in graphic images is represented using  black or combination of cyan  magenta  and yellow     If each value of the RGB signals is the same  the corresponding area will be achromatic   grayed   For example  if R   G   B   0  the corresponding area will be black  If R              100  the corresponding area will be gray  If        B   255  the corresponding area  will be white  that is  there will be no color components   White and black are not colors   They are states in which all the light is reflected and absorbed respectively      If each value of RGB is the same when processing images  the corresponding area can be  represented by using either the same quantity of toner or only K toner for each of CMY    If C   M   Y  the color is black in theory   However  the black represented        M    Y is not the same as the black represented by K alone     When representing an image  for example  if it contains an area represented by R   G    B  the look and impression of that image will be completely different when it is  represented by CMY and when it is represented by K alone   Which look is better is  dependent on the viewer s taste  the contents to be printed  and so on      The graying process defaults to representation using K toner al
39.  Current Font       SCG     Save Current Graphics state          SCOL     Select COLor  SCP     Save Current Position       SCPI     Set Characters Per Inch          SCPL     Save Current PaLette  SCRC     Set Command Recognition Character          SCS     Set Character Spacing  SCSZ     Set Custom paper SiZe       SCU     Save Current Unit          SDP     Store Dash Pattern  SEM     Set Emulation Mode       SETF     SET alternate Font       SFA     Set bitmap Font Attributes       SENT     Select current FoNT by typeface          SGPC     Set kcGl Pen Color  SHMI     Set HMI       SIMG     Set IMaGe model       SIMP     create SIMPle color palette       SIR     Set Image Refinement level          SLJN     Set Line JoiN  SLM     Set Left Margin       SLPI     Set Lines Per Inch          SLPP     Set Lines Per Page  SLS     Set Line Spacing       SMLT     Set Miter LimiT       SMNT     Set MoNiTor simulation       SPAL     Select PALette          SPD     Set Pen Diameter  SPL     Set Page Length          SPO     Set Page Orientation  SPSZ     Set Paper SiZe       SPW     Set Page Width          SRM     Set Right Margin  SRO     Set Raster Options       SROP     Set Raster OPeration       SSTK     select Sorter STacKer       STAK     select paper STAcKer          STAT     STATus  STM     Set Top Margin       STPC     set STaPle Counter          STPL     STaPLe  STR     SeT dot Resolution          STRK     STRoKe current path  SULP     Set UnderLine Parameters       TATR     ap
40.  D  0    File  See ALTB C on page 15   Related Commands    ALTB A                    ALTB E    ALTB E      ALlocate TaBle  End defining  combination characters       Format  ALTB E    Parameter  None   Function  This command signals the end of defining combination characters in an already  generated user defined character table which was started by the ALTB S command    page 20   The registered combined characters can be printed by specifying the character  code which was assigned at the time of definition    Related Command    ALTB S       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ALTB G      ALlocate TaBle  Generate user defined  table    Format    ALTB G  table id  table format     Parameters    table id   table ID number  1 to 65535    table format   1   1         character codes 0 to 255  2   2 byte  character codes 0 to 65533    Function    The ALTB G command generates a user defined table in either 1 byte or 2 byte format   If the same table ID number already exists  the format table is replaced with the newly  generated table        ALTB R    ALTB R      ALlocate TaBle  Release user defined  character table    Format    ALTB R  table id     Parameter    table id     number identifying the character table to be released  Function  The ALTB R command terminates the assignment of the user defined character table for    the current resident font  It is also possible to terminate the assignment of all user   defined character tables by using ALTB R  0         PRESCRIBE Command Refere
41.  Japan   Phone   06  6764 3555  http   www kyoceramita com    Rev  4 6 2008 6    
42.  KYOCERA    PRESCRIBE Commands  Command Reference       We shall have no liability or responsibility to customers or any other person or entity with respect to any liability  loss or  damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by equipment sold or furnished by us  including  but not limited  to  any interruption of service  loss of business or anticipatory profits  or consequential damages resulting from the use or  operation of the equipment or software     NO LIABILITY WILL BE ASSUMED FOR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION   Notice on Software    SOFTWARE USED WITH THIS PRINTER MUST SUPPORT THE PRINTER S NATIVE MODE OR ONE OF ITS EMULA   TION MODES     Notice    This manual  the computer programs in the page printer referred to in this manual  and any other copyrightable subject  matter sold or provided with or in connection with the sale of the page printer  are protected by copyright  All rights are  reserved  Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this manual  the computer programs  or any other copyrightable  subject matter without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited  Any copies made of all or part of  this manual  the computer programs  or any other copyrightable subject must contain the same copyright notice as the  material from which the copying is done     The information in this manual is subject to change without notification  Additional pages may be inserted in future editions   The user is asked
43.  May 20     RIIX 135  M     Aries  21   April 19     RTTX 165          Pisces  19   Mar 20     RTTX 195  T       Aquarius  20   February 18    RET  225  M ee Capricorn  22   January 19    RTIX 255          Sagittarius  22   RTTX 285          Scorpio  24   November 21            3157 M   Libra  23   October 23    RTTX 345            Virgo  23   September 22    PAGE  EXIT     233       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    4   8  a E    5  gt   2    f          o   P  7           CA           e    S         _     E   2                 d  le 8unp          gt      oa   Ne   le    wes q Ve gcorp    EAT NOUS Sa    EO MENT NE    go e        gt  D  5 X  gt  70          02          9 2 5  b            21   gt  E  amp      ge loge 79                            5        9  5    vi   gt         234       RTXT    RTXT     print Right aligned TeXT    Format   RTXT   string        option      U option     Parameters  string    any character string  option    B   Leave cursor at back end of string   E   Move cursor to front end of string   L   Move cursor down one line   N   Move cursor to beginning of next line  U option    Underline text  Function    The RTXT command prints the given string  ending at the cursor location  then moves  the cursor as designated by the option  It accepts either a bitmap font or a scalable font to  print the string     The string must be enclosed in either single or double quotation marks   If the string  includes one kind of quotation mark  use the other k
44.  PDRP x coordinate  y coordinate          Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate     Function    File    coordinates as measured from the current cursor position    The PDRP command adds a line to the current path from the current cursor position to a  specified relative position  measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  The  cursor moves to the specified coordinates  The coordinates may be positive or negative   Negative coordinates may draw the line extending outside the current page  The  thickness of the line is designated by the SPD command     Multiple pairs of coordinates may be specified  The printer then draws a connected series  of line segments  proceeding from one point to the next  For example  PDRP 1  2  3  4  is  equivalent to PDRP 1  2  PDRP 3  4                           UNIT C  SPD  3   CMNT Cube   NEWP   PMZP 5  15   PDRP     0  2   2  0   4   4  0   2  2  0  4   CLSP   PMRP 4  0   PDRP 0   4   4  0  4       22   2   STRK   PAGE   EXIT           PDRP    Printout       Related Command    PDZP    193       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PDZP     in Path  Draw to Zero relative Position    Format    PDZP x coordinate  y coordinate     Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate   coordinates as measured from the left and top edge limits of the current page    Function    The PDZP command adds a line to the current path from the current cursor position to a  position specified relative to the top and left edge limits of the current page  measured in 
45.  PSRC enables the automatic cassette switching depending on media type  and size  The printing system automatically selects the paper cassette having the paper  that matches the type and size defined by MTYP and SPSZ respectively     The PSRC command causes a page break  so it should be placed at the beginning of a file  or program  or at the top of a new page  The current paper source will remain selected if  the specified cassette is not installed     IR  RES  UNIT C                                   SFNT  Helvetica Nr   24    PSRC 1    TEXT  This page is fed from the default cassette     PAGE    PSRC 0    TEXT  This page is fed from the multi purpose tray    PSRC 100  SPSZ 10    TEXT  This page is printed on a A3 sheet that the print  system looks for automatically      PAGE    EXIT           PXPL    PXPL     PiXel PLacement    Format    PXPL mode     Parameter    mode     Function    pixel placement mode    0   Grid intersection  1   Grid centered    The PXPL command determines how pixels are rendered in images  It selects whether  pixels are centered at grid intersections or inside the boxes created by the grid  See the  figure below                                                                     Grid Intersection  HP  Grid Centered  Windows     Assuming a rectangle extending from coordinate  1  1  to coordinate  3  4   a different  result is obtained depending on each pixel placement mode  Grid intersection is default  to HP PCL  and grid centered mode is used by Mi
46.  Path  Draw to Zero relative Position 194  PELP in Path  draw ELlipse 196  PMRA in Path  Move to Relative position specified by Angle 200  PMRP in Path  Move to Relative Position 202  PMZP in Path  Move to Zero relative Position 204  PRBX in Path  draw Round BoX 208  PRRC in Path  at Relative position  draw aRC 210  RPG Return to Previous Graphics state 221  SCAP Set line CAP 265  SCG Save Current Graphics state 271  SDP Store Dash Pattern 284  SIMG Set IMaGe model 297  SLJN Set Line JoiN 304  SMLT Set Miter LimiT 312  STRK STRoKe current path 343       Raster Graphics Commands    Raster graphics commands can be used to draw any graphic design by specifying the  individual dots  The dot resolution is selectable from 75  100  150  200  300  600  and                            1200 dots per inch    Command Function Page  ENDR END Raster data 96  PXPL PiXel PLacement 213  RVCD ReceiVe Compressed raster Data 237  RVRD ReceiVe Raster Data 239  SRO Set Raster Options 329  SROP Set Raster OPeration 331  STR SeT dot Resolution 342       Color Commands    Color commands are used to create a color palette  assign colors to a palette  and specify  colors  In this manual  color commands are marked with under the command  name        PRESCRIBE Command Reference                                                                   Command Function Page  ACLI Add CoLor by Index 12  CID Configure color Image Data 50  CMOD Color MODe 60  CPAL Control PALette 63  GRAY represent GRAY 124  GRRD GRap
47.  SETF  assignment the Technical Refer   ence manual   Country code 0  U6 f      lt  INTL                                              Symbol set Roman 8  U6 7  See Emulation of   US ASCII  U7 t CSET  INTL  the Technical Refer   ence manual t  Current path Empty  lt   lt  NEWP  Graphics pen diam  3 dots  lt   lt  SPD  eter  Line cap Square  lt   lt  SCAP  Line join Beveled join  lt   lt  SLIN  Miter limit 10    lt  SMLT  Flatness 1  lt   lt  FLAT  Dash pattern Solid line  lt   lt  DPAT  SDP  Clipping rectangle     Size of printable  lt                           pattern Solid black  lt   lt  PAT  FPAT   GPAT  Image model Transparent  3   lt   lt  SIMG  Graphics resolution 75 dpi  lt   lt  STR  CR action CR CR  P2   lt     LF action LF LF  P3   lt          a    C6  panel keep  is active with a parameter of 1  default      These values can be set as permanent using the prin system s operator panel only when the FRPO       RESL    RESL     select RESoLution    Format       RESL resolution     Parameter    resolution     Function    300  dpi   600  dpi  or 1200  dpi     The RESL command switches the resolution of the printing system between 300 dpi   600 dpi  and 1200 dpi  When this command is received  the image data currently  remaining is forcibly output on paper  This does not affect the current unit of measure   but the system s memory will be reconfigured  causing PCL resources  fonts  macros   patterns  and symbol sets  which have been downloaded into RAM to be purged     Th
48.  The             command creates a font header for downloading a font to the printer  After  the header is created  you must continue with downloading bitmap characters using the  LDEN C command  This command only generates a font information header  it includes  no character definition information  Since the font header defined by this command is  capable of registering extensions to ANK codes  a 1 byte code   it is necessary to select a  font after assigning fonts using the ASEN command when using 2 byte characters  Refer  to the ASEN command page for details     This command is recommended for use with downloading bitmap fonts  This command  is intended as an equivalent for the old LDFC  LDKC and CRKF commands to create a  new bitmap font  LDFC  LDKC and CRKF will be discontinued in the future        Font Select Command   Description   FONT  SENT European character  1 byte code  emulation   KENT  SKFT Japanese character  2 byte code  emulation   linked using ASEN           A command error will result and the command has no effect if any of the parameters are  outside the given range  This command is ignored if even one parameter error occurs        LDFN S    LDFN S     LoaD truetype FoNt       Format  LDFN S  format  font number  name  length   symbol set  style  stroke   type face    binary data WRED    Parameters   format     font format    0   TrueType font   1   Japanese TrueType font   2   Japanese TrueType Collection font    font number     font number  1000 to 65535
49.  The execution of this  command automatically sets Macro PDFA17 symbol mode     IR  RES             10   A00254    ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0   XBAR           EXIT     375       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 11     enable block count    Format    XBCP 11     Parameter    None    Function  A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional block count field  The XBCP 11    command enables this function  Default is not enabled     The execution of this command also automatically sets Macro PDF417 symbol mode     File  IR  RES     XBCP 11   ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0     XBAR           EXIT     376       XBCP 12    XBCP 12     enable time stamp    Format    XBCP 12  time     Parameter    time    total number of seconds since 00 00 00 AM January 1  1970 Greenwich mean time  Function   A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional time stamp field  The XBCP 12 command    enables this function  The execution of this command also automatically sets Macro  PDF417 symbol mode     File    To set time stamp at 06 15 30AM on Jan  2  1970        IR  RES     XBCP 12  108930   ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0   XBAR        EXIT     377       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 13     enable sender ID    378    Format    XBCP 13   sender id     Parameter    sender id   string containing sender ID    Function    A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional Sender ID field  The XBCP 13 command  enables this field and defines its contents     The string must be surrounded by single or double quote marks  be less than 200  characters 
50.  and  space as 5 dots and that of the remaining bars as 10 dots           IR  UNIT D   BARC 19  Y    O123ABC   60  60  5  10  10  10  10  5  10  10   PAGE    EXIT      0123ABC     37       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    BKLT     print in BooKLeT binding    38    Format    BKLT binding     Parameter    binding     Function    number representing binding mode   0   None   1   Left to right binding   2   Right to left binding    The BKLT command allows printing a job as a booklet  reordering and printing the  pages two up on a sheet of paper  Booklet printing requires the hard disk to be installed  in the printing system     Jil S    The job to booklet print must be defined using the JOBS command  Used together with  the FOLD command  the paper can be folded in the middle to form a booklet     a   First page  b   Last page    Booklet printing is possible for documents of A4  A5  B5  letter  or statement size  documents and are automatically printed on double size paper  namely A3  A4 R  B4   ledger  or letter R  The original page size must be specified by the SPSZ command  for  example  SPSZ 8  for A4 page size  It is also possible to reduce the original page size by  commanding the second parameter for SPSZ  For example  to print two A4 pages on a  A4 sheet  command SPSZ 8  5   For details on page size  refer to the SPSZ command  page in this manual  The document must have the same page size for all pages  If the  double size paper for the document is not available in the print
51.  and 5    and group 3  cassettes 3 and 6   respectively     IR  APSG 1 2 3 1 2 3  EXIT        In this example  when cassette 1 becomes empty  printing will continue using cassette 4  which is the other part of group 1     The APSG sequence is valid after the printing system is switched off  To upgroup paper  cassettes  use parameter 0 as the following example     IR  APSG 1 0 0 1 0 0  EXIT        Paper cassettes of 2 and 5  and 3 and 6 are ungrouped  keeping paper cassettes 1 and 3   group 1  intact     27       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ARC     draw filled in ARC    28    Format    ARC inner radius  outer radius  start angle  end angle     Parameters    inner radius     inner radius of arc    outer radius     outer radius of arc    start angle     starting angle    end angle     Function    ending angle    The ARC command works in the standard graphics mode  It draws a filled in arc shaped  area extending from the inner radius to the outer radius  and from the starting angle to the  ending angle  The area is filled with the pattern designated by the previous PAT  FPAT  or  GPAT command  The starting and ending angles are specified in integer degrees  measured clockwise from the vertical   Note that the PARC command measures the  angles from the positive x axis   The cursor is located at the center of curvature of the  arc  and does not move     If the inner radius is zero  the area has a pie slice shape  and can be used to fill in one  sector of a pie chart     If the i
52.  and save data   without overwriting data      Example   Write and register the FILT prescribe command                        O                          FILT      apl main   Program Data WRED  EXIT                    257       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data    258    to external device  font     Format  RWRF     medium   ENT   font type   file name     font name   font data   length  symbol set value  font style  stroke weight  typeface   Parameters  medium   0   hard disk  A   memory card  font type   0   TrueType Font  1   Japanese TrueType Font  2   Japanese TrueType Font Collection  RSF   RomSlotFormat  file name   ASCII text string up to 11 bytes  Up to 15 bytes for font type RSF  font name     ASCII text string up to 31 bytes  Up to 28 bytes for font type 2    font data length     Number of bytes in font data to be downloaded    symbol set value   1 to 65535  619   Shift JIS code     font style   0 to 32767    stroke weight    127 to 4127    typeface   0 to 32767       Function    RWRFW    The RWRF W command writes data to an external device such as the hard disk    The available number of fonts is max  512 in the same compact flash and max  4096 in  the hard disk    Duplicating a file name causes the system to rename the specified one and save data   without overwriting data     For Japanese TrueType Font Collection  the print system automatically appends  P  for  proportional fonts and  F  for fixed pitch fonts  If True
53.  be one of the resident font  numbers or the number of a nonresident font defined by LDFC  load font character   commands     A scalable font can also be assigned to an alternate number when given a temporary font  number in advance  See the SENT  set font  command page     In some emulation modes  default assignments are given to low alternate numbers so that  SETF commands can be embedded for some word processing software  See Emulation  of the Technical Reference manual                                                                    IR  RES   SFNT  Helvetica   10  2000   SFNT  Helvetica BdOb   10  2001   SETF 1  2000   SETF 2  2001   MCRO BIBLIO   ALTF 1  TEXT  1  E  TEXT      E   ALTF 2  TEXT  2  E  TEXT      E   ALTF 1  TEXT  3  N   NDM     BIBLIOGRAPHY     N U                 Hy                       ALL BIBLIO   Engelberger  Joseph L        Robotics in Practice     Kogan Page     CALL BIBLIO   Cohen  J        Human Robots in Myth and Science     Allen and Irwin    CALL BIBLIO   McCorduck  Pamela       Machines Who Think     W  H  Freeman and Company    CALL BIBLIO   Asimov  Isaac       I  Robot     Doubleday  amp  Co      EXIT              287       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    BIBLIOGRAPHY    Engelberger  Joseph L   Robotics in Practice  Kogan Page   Cohen  J   Human Robots in Myth and Science  Allen and Irwin  McCorduck  Pamela  Machines Who Think  W      Freeman and Company  Asimov  Isaac     Robot  Doubleday  amp  Co     288       SFA    SFA     Se
54.  corresponding to FRPO      to G8 parameter    color   0   Black  1   Red  2   Green  3   Yellow  4   Blue  5   Magenta  6   Cyan  7 2 White    Function    The SGPC command sets the color of a pen 1 through 8 for use with KCGL to a  specified color  The specified value is permanently saved in the printing system     296       SHMI    SHMI     Set HMI    Format    SMHI hmi     Parameter    hmi     Function    File    Printout    horizontal motion index  in a fixed font  the distance from the center of one character to  the center of the next  in a proportionally spaced font  the width of the space character    The SHMI command sets the HMI  The parameter is measured in the unit value specfied  by the UNIT command      R  RES  SLM 1  STM 2  EXIT    his line has the default spacing    IR  UNIT C  SHMI  3  EXIT    his line has a slightly wider spacing    R  SFNT  TimesNewRoman   10  SHMI  3  EXIT   Proportional fonts are not influenced    R  PAGE  EXIT        p                                               This line has the default spacing   This line has a slightly wider spacing     This is a proportional font printed with wider spacing     This is a proportional font printed with default spacing     297       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SIMG     Set IMaGe model    298    Format    SIMG operation mode      Parameter    operation mode     Function    Source image Pattern image    1   Transparent     2 2 Opaque     3  Transparent Transparent  4   Transparent Opaque   5 Opaque T
55.  current cursor position to a specified relative  position  The thickness of the line is designated by the SPD  set pen diameter  command   The coordinates and line thickness are measured by the value designated by the UNIT  command     Multiple pairs of coordinates may be specified  The printing system then draws a  connected series of line segments  proceeding from one point to the next  For example   DRP 1  2  3  4  isequivalenttoDRP 1  2  DRP 3  4  The coordinates may  be positive or negative     The DRP command is ignored in the path mode graphics  To add a line segment to a  path  use the PDRP  in Path  Draw to Relative Position  command              IR  RES   UNIT C  SPD  3   CMNT Cube   ZP 5  10   DRP 4  0  2   2  0   y  4       2y 2  Oy  4   RP 4  0   DRE 0   4   4  0  4  0  2   2                                 DRP    Printout       Related Command    PDRP    81       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    DRPA     Draw to Relative Position specified by    82    Angle             Format  DRPA length  angle   Parameters  length   length of the line  angle   angle in degrees  measured clockwise from the vertical  Function  The DRPA command draws a line of a specified length at a specified angle  starting from  the current cursor position  with the thickness designated by the SPD command   This command is ignored if placed within a path   File  IR  RES    UNIT      MAP 2  11   DRPA 2  72   DRPA 2  0   DRPA 2  144   DRPA 2  72   DRPA 2  216   DRPA 2  144   DRPA 2  288   DRPA 2 
56.  data such as 3000 bytes  ENDB   EXIT                 XBCP 17    Printout               4         383       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 18     enable Macro PDF417 symbol mode    384    Format    XBCP 18   block index       Parameter    block index   O to k 1  and k is the number of blocks    Function    Executing the XBCP 18 command enables the Macro PDF417 symbol mode  The Macro  PDF417 symbol mode directs the reader to separate large data and allows Macro  PDF417 two dimensional barcodes with a single file id     File  To bar code data    abedX YZ12345    as a Macro PDF417 using block indices 0  1  and 2     IR   UNIT C  CMNT Set unit to centimeters   XBCP 17  file id   CMNT Set file ID to file id   ZP 1 0  CMNT Move cursor to  1  0   centimeters    XBCP 18 0  CMNT Set block index 0 to next data   XBAR  abcd ENDB  CMNT Encode and print data  abcd    N 5  6             2   1 5     Move cursor to  1     centimeters    XBCP 18 1  NT Set block index 1 to next data    XBAR  XYZ ENDB  CMNT Encode and print data  XYZ     ZP 1 10  CMNT Move cursor to  1  10   centimeters    XBCP 18 2  CMNT Set block index 2 to next data    XBAR  12345 ENDB  CMNT Encode and print data  12345    EXIT                                                                                pl          doc       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 19     position symbols at the specified    386    Format    locations    XBCP 19   xl  yl  x2  y2  x3                 Parameter    xl  yl  x2  y2  x3  33     F
57.  delivered to the face up tray with the pages in reverse    order     page 3 on top                 PAGE  EXIT           177       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PAGE     start new PAGE    Format    PAGE        Parameter    None    Function    The PAGE command causes a page break without resetting the printer  Subsequent data    will be printed on a new page with no changes made to page formatting parameters such  as spacing  margins  font selection     If there is no printing on the current page  the PAGE command will have no effect  It  does not feed out a blank page     File                IR  RES    SLM 1  STM 1    EXIT    Page 1    Following this line  a page break will occur     IR  PAGE  EXIT   Page 2                 178       PANT    PANT     create PANTone color palette    Format    PANT color number or   color name       Parameters    color number     Pantone color number  integer from 100 to 5999    color name     Function    Pantone color name    The PANT command can be used to specify the PANTONE uncoated color by number or  name   See http   www pantone com for details on Pantone Colors      The following should be noted when specifying a color by its PANTONE number       In PANTONE numbers  a C or U symbol is added after the number to distinguish  between coated and uncoated  These symbols are not necessary when a color is  specified using the PRESCRIBE command  In fact  the command becomes invalid if  one of these symbols is added to a number  If there is no c
58.  encoding  2  if the default font and symbol set is of 2 byte     This command is valid only in HP emulation        TRSM    TRSM     TRansparency Separate Mode    Format  TRSM mode   tray    Parameters  mode   Transparency separate mode   0   Off      Inserting a blank page  2   Inserting a page which the transparency content is printed on  tray   The number of the paper source which the inserting paper loads from    or above  The  number varies depending on the printing system and its configuration  When omitting  the tray parameter    is automatically set to the tray parameter   Function    The TRSM command instructs printing system to insert blank or printed page between  each transparency  The printing system loads transparency from MP tray and inserting  paper from the paper source other than MP tray  When face down printing  the printing  system print the transparency page first  When face up printing  the printing system print  the blank or printed page first     File                     TRSM 1    JOBS 0 1 2 0   TEXT  page 1    PAGE    TEXT  page 2    PAGE    JOBT    EXIT     2   t                       351       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    UNIT     set UNIT of measurement    352    Format    UNIT code     Parameter    code     Function    File    I   inches   C   centimeters  P   points   D   dots    The UNIT command sets the unit of measurement used in other PRESCRIBE  commands     The initial unit is inches  Other supported units of measurement can be calculated 
59.  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt  gt  lt         RES   EXIT              Printout    OO O L    FTMD    Font 47  correctly spaced at 16 6 cpi  Font 37  correctly spaced at 10 cpi    Font 52  proportionally spaced    II VAVAVAVAVAVAVAVAVANVAVAVAVAVAV II    121       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    GPAT     set Gray PATtern    122    Format  GPAT gray level    Parameter   gray level   any number from 0  black  to 1  white    Function  The GPAT command specifies the shade of gray for painting a block in both the standard  mode and path mode graphics  Numbers with up to four decimal places are accepted   The default value is 0  solid black    The printer recognizes a dot in the pattern as having the size of 1 300 inch in the 300 dpi  resolution  and 1 600 inch in the 600 dpi resolution  and 1 1200 inch in the 1200 dpi  resolution  For printer models that support 600 1200 dpi resolution printing  the default  resolution generated by the GPAT command is 300 dpi  however  600 1200 dpi can be  selected using the FRPO B8 command  See Section 6 2  of the Technical Reference  manual           B3     File    IR  RES  UNIT C    CRO GP    NEWP    GPAT  1    DRP 2         0  2   2  0  Oy   2        U                CALL GP    1253  CALL GP   25   CALL GP   375   CALL GP   5    CALL GP   625   CALL GP  75   CALL GP  875                                   EXIT        GPAT    Printout       Related Commands    FPAT  PAT    123       PRESCRIBE
60.  is specified in the unit value designated by the UNIT  command  The maximum thickness is 4200 dots  14 inches or 35 56 centimeters  in path  graphics mode  and 127 dots  0 42 inches or 1 08 centimeters  in standard graphics  mode  The minimum thickness is 1 dot  about 0 01 centimeters or 0 0033 inches   The  printing system rounds off all decimal values to the nearest integer value     The SPD command affects graphics segments created by DZP  DAP  DRP  DRPA  BOX   CIR  and PIE commands  It also affects the width of the line and curve segments stroked  as paths     A slant line drawn by the standard graphics commands becomes thicker than specified  by the SPD command  The effect may be most noticeable with a 45  slant  In the path  mode graphics  however  the thickness of any slant lines is automatically adjusted so that  the slant lines are maintained in constant thickness as specified by SPD   See below          Thickness of the line drawn by printing sys   tem             Thickness specified by SPD    317       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    318    File    Printout    IR  RES  UNIT     STM 2  SLM 2  SLS  6   SFNT  Helvetica Nr                                 SPD 0 01         5  0  TEXT   0 01 cm          SPD 0 02         5  0  TEXT     0 02 cm          SPD 0 05  DRP 5  0  TEXT   0 05 cm   N   SPD 0 1         5  0  TEXT   0 1 cm          SED 0 2  DRP 5  0  TEXT    0 2 cm                      PAGE  EXIT              0 01 cm       0 02 cm  0 05 cm                             
61.  is used for the  miter join     Miter limit   10 Miter limit 3 t    312                      SMLT          File        RES  UNIT C                PMZP 5  15   SPDs 25   SLIN 2  CMNT Mitered join   PDRE  1435   22 LAS 22  1 534  2         Andes E2 eS 22  SMLT 10  CMNT Miter limit is 10   STRK   NEWP   PMZP 5  19   SPD  5   SLUN 2  CMNT Mitered join   BDRP 1255 92  Lbs 2          2          AGBS  22   l5     Zz   SMLT 1  CMNT Miter limit is 1   STRK   PAGE   EXIT    Printout   Related Command    SLJN    313       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SMNT     Set MoNiTor simulation    314    Format  SMNT monitor type   temperature  red x  red y  green x  green y  blue x  blue y   gamma      Parameters    monitor type     0   None   1   SMPTE 240M   2   HDTV  sRGB   default   3   Sony Trinitron    4   Apple RGB   5   NTSC   6   KC RGB   7   Custom  temperature     color temperature  3500  5000  5500  6500  default   6740  7500  9300    red x red y        gamma    Function    chromaticity coordinates     red x  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 64   red y  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 33   green x  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 30   green y  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 60   blue x  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 15   blue y  number from 0 0 to 3 0  default   0 06     value of gamma correction   number from 1 0 to 3 0  default   2 2     The SMNT command simulates a particular monitor or a monitor customized by    specifying the color temperature  etc  Paramet
62.  jobs to the same stack   Note  however the jobs with stapling enabled will be forcibly sent to the stapler     The master password  if set previously by VMPW  is valid for all virtual mailboxes for  which a password is set  An error will be displayed on the operator panel if no password  or an incorrect password is specified  An error will result also if no virtual mailbox  corresponds to the alias given or if no job is present in the specified mailbox  It is not  possible to select a virtual mailbox using the operator panel when no jobs are posted in  the virtual mailbox     If the CANCEL key is pressed during virtual mailbox job output  processing will halt  and the printing system will return to Ready status  The job being output and jobs in the  virtual mailbox can be printed     To output the job with job ID 4  9005810 in the hard disk  with no barcode printed       7  copies     IR  JOBP 0  7  JOBP 1  2  JOBO 0   4H9005810    EXIT        To print the jobs stacked on virtual mailbox number 3  for which no password is set     IR           8  3  EXIT        To output the jobs stacked on the virtual mailbox with the alias Jonathan  for which the  password 9999 is set           JOBO 8   Jonathan   9999  EXIT        137       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBP     JOB  print with Print options    138    Format    JOBP print option  parameter      Parameters    print option     an integer that specifies the print option from the ones below    parameter     an integer  the le
63.  number     Parameter    number     Function    File    number of lines per page    The SLPP command sets the bottom margin for an exact number of lines per page based  on the current line spacing  As long as you do not change the line spacing or use  PRESCRIBE commands that move the cursor  you will get the specified number of lines    per page     To control the page size in terms of inches or centimeters instead of a number of lines   use the SBM  Set Bottom Margin  or SPL  Set Page Length  command  The advantage  of the SLPP command is that it sets the bottom margin to accommodate an exact number  of lines  so no excess is carried over to the next page     A bottom margin setting in a document file should be placed at the beginning of the file  or at a page break           RES  UNIT C    SFNT  TimesNewRoman     STM 1  SLS 1  SLPP 10    EXIT  E    Top margin at 1 cm  with 10 lines per page   Line 1   Line 2   Line                Line  Line  Line  Line         I           4   CO    Line  Line 9  Line 10  Line 11  Line 12        PAGE  EXIT                       309       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       Top margin at 1 cm  with 10 lines per page   Line 1   Line 2  Line 3  Line 4       Line 11  Line 5           Line 12  Line 7  Line 8  Line 9    Line 10    310       SLS    SLS     Set Line Spacing    Format    SLS distance     Parameter    distance     Line to line spacing    Function    The SLS command sets the distance from the base of one line to the base of t
64.  of Kyocera Corporation    KYOCERA MITA NORGE   Postboks 150 Oppsal  NO 0619 Oslo  Olaf Helsetsvei 6  NO 0694 Oslo   Norway   Phone   47 22 62 73 00    KYOCERA MITA DANMARK A S  Ejby Industrivej 1  DK 2600 Glostrup   Denmark   Phone   45 5687 1100    KYOCERA MITA PORTUGAL LDA    Rua do Centro Cultural  41  Alvalade  1700 106 Lisbon   Portugal   Phone   351 21 842 9100    KYOCERA MITA SOUTH AFRICA  PTY  LTD   527 Kyalami Boulevard    Kyalami Business Park Midrand    South Africa   Phone   27  0 11 540 2600    KYOCERA MITA AMERICA  INC     Headquarters    225 Sand Road    Fairfield  New Jersey 07004 0008   U S A    Phone   973  808 8444    KYOCERA MITA AUSTRALIA PTY  LTD   Level 3  6 10 Talavera Road  North Ryde   N S W  2113 Australia   Phone   02  9888 9999    KYOCERA MITA NEW ZEALAND LTD   1 3 Parkhead Place  Albany   P O  Box 302 125 NHPC  Auckland    New Zealand   Phone   09  415 4517    KYOCERA MITA  THAILAND  CORP   LTD   9 209 Ratchada Prachachem Road    Bang Sue  Bangkok 10800  Thailand   Phone   02  586 0320    KYOCERA MITA SINGAPORE PTE LTD   121 Genting Lane  3rd Level    Singapore 349572   Phone  67418733    KYOCERA MITA HONG KONG LIMITED  11 F   Mita Centre    552 566  Castle Peak Road    Tsuen Wan  New Territories    Hong Kong   Phone  24297422    KYOCERA MITA TAIWAN Corporation   7F 1 2  No 41  Lane 221  Gangchi Rd   Neihu District  Taipei  Taiwan  114  R O C   Phone   02  87511560    KYOCERA MITA Corporation  2 28  1 chome  Tamatsukuri  Chuo ku  Osaka 540 8585 
65.  of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function 2  Access Commands 2  Print System Setting Commands 2  Margin and Page Portrait Landscape Orientation Commands 3  Font Commands 4  Cursor Movement Commands 5  Vector Graphics Commands 5  Path Mode Graphics Commands 6  Raster Graphics Commands 7  Color Commands 7  Barcode Commands 8  Macro Commands 8  Debug Commands 9  External Media Control Commands 9  e MPS Commands 10   PRESCRIBE Commands 11  ACLI     Add CoLor by Index 12  ALTB A      ALlocate TaBle  Assign user defined character table 14  ALTB C      ALlocate TaBle  Convert character code 15  ALTB D      ALlocate TaBle  Delete user defined character table 16  ALTB E      ALlocate TaBle  End defining combination characters 17  ALTB G      ALlocate TaBle  Generate user defined table 18  ALTB R      ALlocate TaBle  Release user defined character table 19  ALTB        ALlocate TaBle  Start to define the combination character                             20  ALTB T      ALlocate TaBle  define combined character by Table 21  ALTF     change to ALTernate Font 23  AMCR     call Automatic MaCRo 25  APSG     Assign Paper Source Group 27  ARC     draw filled in ARC 28  ASEN     ASsign external characters for FoNt 31  ASTK     Assign STacKer trays 32  BARC     draw BARCode 34  BKLT     print in BooKLeT binding 38  BLK     draw filled in BLocK 40  BOX     draw BOX 42  CALL     CALL macro 44  CCPY     Carbon CoPY 46  CDSK     Check hard DiSK 49  CID     Configure color Image Data 50  CIR     draw CIRcl
66.  of the block  depth    depth of the block  option    B   Leave the cursor unmoved  Default    H   Move the cursor to the horizontally adjacent corner   V z Move the cursor to the vertically adjacent corner   E   Move the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner   L   Move the cursor one line down   N   Move the cursor to the beginning of the next line   B option  No motion   H option  N option L option  Left margin  V option E option   Function    The BLK command draws a block of a specified size with one corner at the current  cursor position  The block is filled in with the pattern designated by the previous PAT   FPAT  or GPAT command  The cursor is moved as specified by the option  If the option  is omitted  the cursor is not moved  same as option B         BLK    File    UNIT C     ES        RE    UR                      LA  LA  LA  r    H  H   H  H          TON n        ul  e oc n ud  M M            A     e         m em rn nm         0 ES  A    TON 4        H    Wh 24    SP       ON Sn ON OM  M        H    oe n ud     1 43      m   M   OA x                      gt  fm                 4 4 t n6  B oe      pm e  LO                 gt                      MC TEE      SO ss SDE                   on 0             ON M HMO c                    A E4   4    X    Zi X    EA EH           CO        amp          Qi    Q5 lu Bl Qi                                 m aem      Qi Qi Qi Qi    Bd       Printout    E                    41       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    BOX     draw B
67.  pen color  296    KIR  303   refinement level  303  KPDL  286  Kyocera Image Refinement  303    L   left  306   Lightness  155   Line  73  80  82  87  drawing by angle  82  drawing to absolute  73  drawing to relative  80  drawing to zero relative  87  Line join  304   Line end  caps   265   Line join  312  beveled  304  miter limite  312  mitered  304  notched  304  round  304   Line spacing  311   Lines per inch  308   Lines per page  309   Logical page  189  diagrams  190  Print direction  189    M  Macro  72  76  automatic macro  25  calling a  44  commands  8  defining  160  deleting a  76  deleting all  72  dummy parameter  160  ending a  94  macro overlay  25  sources  locations  properties  161  mailbox  170  Margin  263  306  bottom  263  right  327  top  337  Margine  left margin  306  Media type  162  163  171  attributing media type  162  163  Memory card  245  249  255  257  autostart  255  Miter limit  304  312  Mitered line join  304  Monitor simulation  314  Move  157  166  173  moving to absolute  157  moving to relative  166  moving to zero relative  173  Moving specifying angle  168    Index 3    N  Notched line join  304  Number of copies  61        Operation mode  298    P   Page break  178   Page length  319   Page orientation  321   Page width  325   Palette  63  277  creating simple color  301  selecting  316   Pantone  179  creating a palette  179  Pantone colors  36  180   Paper cassette  grouping  27   Paper size  28 1  323  customize  281  enlarge
68.  simulation is set to other than None  this command is disabled     This mode is not held in the printing system  For this reason  saturation is reset to its  default state when the power is turned on        SBM    SBM     Set Bottom Margin    Format    SBM length     Parameter    length     Function    File    distance from top of paper to bottom margin    The SBM command sets the bottom margin  as measured from the top edge limit of the  paper in the units designated by the UNIT command     If an attempt is made to print below the bottom margin  the characters will be printed on  the next page     A bottom margin setting in a document file should be placed at the beginning of the file  or at a page break     The SPL  set page length  and SLPP  set lines per page  commands also set the bottom  margin  but these commands measure from the top margin position     IR  RES  UNIT C    STM 1  SLS 1  SBM 11    SFNT  Helvetica Nr     EXIT  E    Top margin at 1 cm  bottom margin at 11 cm   Line 1   Line 2   Line             Line  Line  Line  Line         I         4 CO    Line  Line 9  Line 10  Line 11  Line 12  IR  PAGE  EXIT                    263       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    264    Printout       Top margin at 1 cm  bottom margin at 11 cm   Line 1     Line 2  Line 3   Line 11  Line 4   Line 12  Line 5  Line 6       SCAP     Set line CAP    Format    SCAP mode     Parameter    mode     line cap mode       2 square caps  2   butt caps  3   round caps    Function    SCAP    Th
69.  the memory area can  cause a memory error     File    R  RES  UNIT C    EWP    MZP 5  5    FNT  Helvetica Bd   72   PTH  Mary     CG                        H      2   A             271       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       Related Commands    FILL  RPG    272       SCOL    SCOL     Select COLor    Format  SCOL number   Parameter  number   number from 0 to 255  Default is 0    Function  The SCOL command selects a color from the currently active palette   If no color is assigned to the specified number  this command is ignored  If the specified  number exceeds the valid range  this command is invalid   Color specification using SCOL affects the following objects to be printed     Texts  e Vector graphics    Monochrome patterns    Monochrome raster images  And  it does not affect the following objects     Color patterns    Color raster images  Once a color is specified by SCOL  the active color does not change until the next color  specification is made even if a palette is created  changed or deleted   File and Printout  See ACLI on page 12   Related Commands    ACLI    273       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SCP     Save Current Position    274    Format  SCP    Parameter  None   Function  The SCP command instructs the printing system to remember the current cursor position   so that it can be retrieved later using the RPP  return to previous position  command   Up to eight positions can be saved in the printing system   s memory  using a separate  SCP command 
70.  the units designated by the UNIT command  The cursor moves to the specified  coordinates     The coordinates may be positive or negative  Negative coordinates may draw the line  extending outside the current page  The thickness of the line is designated by the SPD  command     File             IR  RES  UNIT C   NEWP   PMZP 0  0  PDZP 0  5   PMZP 1  0  PDZP 0  4   PMZP 2  0  PDZP 0  3   PMZP 3  0  PDZP 0  2   PMZP 4  0  PDZP 0  1   PMZP 5  0  PDZP O  0   STRK   PAGE    EXIT        194       PDZP    Printout    Related Command    PDRP    195       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PELP     in Path  draw ELlipse    196       Format   PELP x diagonal  y diagonal   x start  y start  x end  y end   ellipse    path      Parameters  x diagonal    X coordinate of diagonal point of bounding box  y diagonal    Y coordinate of diagonal point of bounding box  Xx start    X coordinate of start control point of the ellipse  y start    Y coordinate of start control point of the ellipse  x end    X coordinate of end control point of the ellipse  y end    Y coordinate of end control point of the ellipse  ellipse path    ellipse options    N   define an ellipse path        define an ellipse based arc path   P   define an ellipse based pie shape path  Function    The PELP command adds an ellipse based path to the current path  This command  cannot paint figures by itself  In addition  STRK or FILL is required  A complete ellipse  path will be defined if the parameters in brackets are omitted  Exec
71.  thin disk          t       onsisting of young and intermediate age stars   this disk  lso contains gas and is actively forming new stars  Dust in  he disk makes it appear orange in the picture  Dust absorbs  blue light more than red light and thus makes stars appear  reddish  Our Galaxy has spiral arms in its disk   these  Spiral arms are regions of active star formation  ENDB                 a us rwr             363       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 0     select barcode type reset all other XBCP    364    parameters    Format    XBCP Of  type      Parameter    type     two dimensional barcode type     1   PDF417  only type currently supported     Function  The XBCP 0 command selects a barcode type and resets all parameters to the defaults   File    See XBCP 1  page 365  command page        XBCP 1    XBCP 1     specify narrowest element width    Format    XBCP 1  element width     Parameter    element width     Function    File    Printout    narrowest bar and space width     More than or equal to 1 dot  If less than 1 dot  truncated to 1 dot  Default is 3 dots     PDF417 supports 8 different bar and space widths  The each width is a multiple of 1 to 8  times of the narrowest element width  The XBCP command set to mode 1 specifies the  narrowest element width  narrowest bar width  in the current unit as designated by a  UNIT command     In the following example  the element width is set to  02 inches as the default unit is  inches  Minimum width allowed by the printi
72.  to excuse any omissions or errors in the present edition     No responsibility is assumed if accidents occur while the user is following the instructions in this manual  No responsibility  is assumed for defects in the printer s firmware     Regarding Tradenames   PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation  KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation     Diablo 630 is a product of Xerox Corporation  IBM Proprinter X 24E is a product of International Business Machines Corpo   ration  Epson LQ 850 is a product of Seiko Epson Corporation  HP LaserJet IIl  HP LaserJet 4  HP LaserJet 4 Plus  HP  LaserJet 5Si  HP LaserJet 5P  HP LaserJet 5M  HP LaserJet 2100  HP LaserJet 4000  and HP 7550A are products of  Hewlett Packard Company  Hewlett Packard  PCL  and HP GL are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company   Centronics is a trade name of Centronics Data Computer Corp  Other product names and company names that appear in  this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners     Typeface Trademark Acknowledgement    All resident fonts in the print system are licensed from Bitstream Inc  and Agfa corporation  For font license information for  each model  refer to the User s Manual     Helvetica  Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Hell AG  Centutry Schoolbook  Stymie  and Cooper   Black are trademarks of Kingsley ATF Type Corporation  ITC Avant Garde Gothic  ITC ZapfChancery  ITC ZapfDingbats   ITC Souvenir  ITC Be
73.  tray  334  stacker  170  Staple  141  339  changing number of pages  339  position  340  Starting a new page  178  Starting a new path  175  Starting angle  28  181  198  Status page  335  user mode and service mode  335  Symbol set  65  129  225  267  293  as a bitmap attribute  289  ID by CSET  65  returning to the saved set  225    T  Temporary job  140  Test page  335  Text  69  348    centering a  69    Text parsing  350 Z  Thickness  317 Zero relative position  87  173  TIFF 4 0  238  Transparency  298  351  TrueType  153  246  loading     153  Two dimentional barcode  addressee ID  379  automatic rows and columns  373  bar height  372  block count  376  checksum  381  data code word columns  369  data code word rows  368  error correction level  367  error correction level by percentage  366  file ID control  382  file name  375  file size  380  macro PDF417  384  naming buffer  390  positioning at specified locations  386  printing a  362  ratio of height and width  370  selecting type  364  sender ID  378  specifying narrowest width  365  time stamp  377  truncation  374  type of paper  347  Typeface  293    U    Underline  345  distance and thickness  345   Unit  282  352  saving current  282   Unit of measurement  282  35 2  354  per dots  354    V    Vector graphics  commands  5  Virtrual mailbox  spooling as a job  141  Virtual mailbox  35 6  357  aliasing a mailbox  356  assigning a mailbox to receive jobs  357  definiing a job to store in a mailbox  140  passw
74.  tray  tray       orSSTK 0   Parameter  tray    number from 1 to the maximum  bottom   Function    The SSTK command is effective only when the optional sorter is installed to the printing  system  It instructs the printing system to deliver printed pages in the sorter mode  Each  specified tray receives a complete set of pages  one copy of each     If the parameters are omitted  the top n trays are used  where    is the copy count  equal or  less than the number of trays   If you specify the copy count which is greater than the  number of the trays being selected  the bulk tray receives the overflowed pages  If the  tray parameters are specified  the COPY command is unnecessary as the printing system  automatically makes the copy count to be the same as the number of the tray parameters  specified     Upon receiving the SSTK command  the printing system automatically performs a page  feed     If the parameter is 0 for SSTK  SSTK 0   this command disables sorting and delivers all  pages to the bulk output tray     This command is irrelevant to certain combination of photocopier models and option fin   isher models                 RES  SSTK 1  3  5  EXIT     Three copies of this file will be printed   The output goes to sorter trays 1  3  and 5   IR  PAGE  EXIT   If the tray parameters were omitted  SSTK  COPY3    sorter  trays 1  2  and 3 would be used    IR  PAGE  EXIT                                   333       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    STAK     select paper STAcKer    
75.  will be invalid and no error will be displayed on the operator  panel     The master password is valid for all virtual mailboxes     File    To set the alias MyMailbox for virtual mailbox number 3 for which the password 9999  has been set              VMAL 3   MyMailbox   9999  EXIT        VMOB    VMOB     virtual Mailbox Output Bin    Format    VMOB mailbox     Parameter    mailbox     number from 1 to 255 or character string representing an alias    Function    The VMOB command specifies virtual mailboxes that receive print jobs  It is possible to  specify multiple virtual mailboxes by issuing multiple instances of this command     If no virtual mailbox corresponds to the alias given  an error will be displayed on the  operator panel   See the Technical Reference manual      2  This command is irrelevant to photocopy virtual mailbox function     To stack jobs on virtual mailbox number 3                    3  EXIT           To stack jobs on the virtual mailbox having the alias  MyMailbox                     MyMailbox   EXIT        357       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    VMPW     set Virtual Mailbox PassWord    358    Format  VMPW mailbox  current password  new password    Parameters  mailbox   0   Sets the master password  1 to 255   Number of virtual mailbox for which the password is set  Character string     Alias of virtual mailbox for which the password is set  current password     1 to 65535   Current password for the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox  0   Indicate
76. 00                       PAGE  EXIT                 UOM    Printout  UOM 120  BOX 100  100   UOM 720  BOX 100  100   L   Related Command  UNIT    355       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    VMAL     virtual Mailbox ALias    356    Format    VMAL mailbox  alias   password       Parameters    mailbox   number from   to 255 or character string representing number or alias of virtual mailbox    alias   Character string representing the alias being set for the virtual mailbox given by mailbox   up to 31 bytes     password   The password for the virtual mailbox given by mailbox if a password has been set for it     Function    The VMAL command sets an alias for a virtual mailbox  When an alias is set for a  virtual mailbox using this command  that alias may be used to identify the mailbox just  like the virtual mailbox number     If this command is used on a virtual mailbox for which an alias has already been set  the  old alias will be overwritten  If the alias specified has already been set for another virtual  mailbox  an error will be displayed on the operator panel and the specification will be  invalid     If an alias is to be set for a virtual mailbox for which a password is set  that virtual  mailbox s password is required  An error will be displayed on the operator panel if no  password or the incorrect password is specified   See the Technical Reference manual      Note that if command syntax is incorrect  such as when an alias longer than 31 bytes is  specified  the command
77. 00           35       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    36    Table 20 Characters that can be used                                                                                                                               Type Max Characters to be used Default  0 11 0123456789 0   1 13 0123456789 0   2 16 0123456789 0   3 13 0123456789 0   4 18 0123456789 0   5 22 0123456789 0   6 25 0123456789 0   7 29 0123456789 0   8 6 0123456789 0   9 0123456789 0   10 11 0123456789 0      7 0123456789 0   12 12 0123456789 0   13 13 0123456789 0   14 15 0123456789 0   15 1 14 0123456789 0   16 1 14 0123456789 0   17 1 14 0123456789 0   18 1 14 0123456789 0   19 1 40       0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ and spaces space  20 1 40      0123456789ABCDEFGHIKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ and spaces space  21 2 26 0123456789 0   22 1 25 0123456789 0   23 1 40       ASCII characters 32   126  space  24 2 40 All  ASCII characters 32   126  space  25 1 45  0123456789 space  26 1 45  0123456789 space  27 1 50 AI  ASCII characters 32   126  space  28 3 32     0123456789 abcdetn      29 1 25 0123456789 0   30 1 25 0123456789 0   31 1 25 0123456789 0   32 1 25  0123456789 0   33 1 25 0123456789KLMO 0   34 1 25 0123456789KLMO 0   35 9 0123456789 0   36 12 0123456789 0   37 14 0123456789 0   38 17 0123456789 0   39 139 0123456789            BARC       Type Max Characters to be used Default    40 1 The following FIM pattern type 0  A  Country Reply Mail with POSTNET  B  Business Reply  Penalty and Franked Mail wi
78. 10     Parameters    pattern number     number from 11 to 20    dash      10   length of dash  spacel     10     Function    space between dashes    The SDP command generates a new dash pattern used by the DPAT  dashed pattern   command for stroking a path  The dash and space values represent the lengths of  alternating black and white segments for stroking the line segment in the path  using the  unit value designated by the UNIT command     Forexample SDP 11  2  2  5  5  stores the following dash pattern in pattern  number 11     Beginning of the pattern End of the pattern  2 2 5 5    The maximum number of pairs of dash and space allowed for a SDP command is 10  If  the dash pattern begins with a space  0 must be specified for the first dash value  dash    To end the pattern with a dash  the last space value may be omitted     The user defined dash patterns are valid until another SDP command changes the current  definition or until the printing system is switched off        SDP                File        RES  UNIT P   SDP ll  25  2  5j 058  NEWP   UNIT C   SPD  2  PMRA 10  10  3  0   DPAT 11  PARC 10  10  3  0  360   STRK   PAGE   EXIT   Printout  e  wt ga                                     x    a                             gt                                     In ET Bias  Related Command  DPAT    285       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SEM     Set Emulation Mode    286       Format   SEM mode   Parameter  mode    0   Line Printer     2 IBM Proprinter X 24E   2   Diabl
79. 12    EXIT    Affixed to the door was a large sign that read        R  SCF  SFNT  Univers BdIt   20                    RP 1   423   TEXT  KEEP OUT      RPF    EXIT     Being one of those people who assume that such  signs are put up to be ignored  she reached out       269       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Affixed to the door was a large sign that read     KEEP OUT    Being one of those people who assume that such  signs are put up to be ignored  she reached out    Related Command    RPF    270       SCG    SCG     Save Current Graphics state    Format    SCG     Parameter    None    Function  The SCG command saves the graphics state comprised of the following characteristics       Current path and cursor position    Current pen diameter     Current line join     Current line cap   e Current miter limit     Current dash pattern     Current flatness   e Current current fill pattern  16 x 16 dots     Current current clipping path     Current raster resolution     Current image model    Once the current graphics state is saved  it can be retrieved later using the RPG  return to  previous graphics state  command  Saving and retrieving the graphics state in this way  simplifies recovery of paths which stroke a filled and outlined shape  Note that the FILL  command clears the current path  leaving no strokable path     The printing system holds as much graphics state information as the user memory area  can accommodate  however  graphics state information larger than
80. 12v   upright style  0s   normal stroke weight  0b   Letter Gothic   6T  font  This command sequence may be followed by a CSET command which selects  the desired symbol set     Fixed or    proportional Height Weight    lll    FSET 0p12h12v0s0b6T     LIT    Pitch Style Typeface    117       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    118    File    Printout          UNIT P  SENT  Swiss742SWC Roman   10  SLS 12  EXIT   First  this line is printed in a 10 point Swiss742SWC Roman  font              IR  FSET 14V  SLS 16  EXIT  E   Let s see if the height parameter is changed to 14  points by FSET 14V                        IR  FSET 1s3B  EXIT E   Now this line demonstrates what happens with FSET  1s3B   Only the style and stroke weight are changed                                      FSET 4101T  SLS 14  EXIT E    The FSET 4101T  command switches the typeface to  CGTimes  All other characteristics remain  unchanged                          IR  FSET OP  FIMD 15  EXIT E    Now the FSET 0P  command requests a fixed pitch  font  The method for selecting this font is based  on the change from the previous pitch  characteristic                                 IR  PAGE  EXIT     First  this line is printed in a 10 point Swiss742SWC Roman font     Let s see if the height parameter is changed to 14  points by FSET 14V      Now this line demonstrates what happens with FSET  1s3B   Only the style and stroke weight are changed     The FSET 4101T  command switches the typeface to  CGTimes  All other charact
81. 334    Format  STAK stacker   Parameter  stacker       printing system s face down output tray  2   face up output tray of the printing system or the option stacker  3   face down output tray of the option stacker  51   face up output tray of the option mailbox  52   face down output tray of the option mailbox  61   face down output tray of the option job separator  or the DF 610 subtray   62   face up output tray of the DF 610 subtray  Function    File    The STAK command instructs the printing system to deliver pages to the corresponding  output stack of the printing system or the option stacker  The selected tray remains in  effect until changed by another STAK command  The default value is 1  the printing  system s face down tray     If an optional device such as a stacker  a document finisher  or a sorter is installed  the  stacker value 2 instructs the printing system to deliver printed pages to its face up tray   the value 3 delivers the pages to its face down tray  The stacker values of 51  52  and 61  are valid for certain copiers installed with the applicable option device     The STAK command should be placed at the top of a file or program           5       2  EXIT    PAGE 1   On printers with only one paper tray this file will be  delivered face down as usual  page 1 first          PAGE  EXIT   PAGE 2  PAGE 2 next  and so on  stacking in the correct order         PAGE  EXIT   PAGE 3   But on printers with two paper trays this file will be  delivered to the face u
82. 37       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       First page with 2 cm top margin       Second page with 4 cm top margin    338       STPC    STPC     set STaPle Counter    Format    STPC  staple count or letter M  or m        Parameter    staple count     Function    File    number of sheets to be stapled at a time  When this parameter is omitted     0    is  assumed      2 to 50    divides output pages into stacks of pages of this value and staples each of  them  The odd stack is also stapled    M   divides output pages into stacks of pages equal to the maximum allowable number  of sheets of stapling and staples each of them  The odd stack is also stapled    0   same as M above but does not divide nor staple a job at all if the total number of  pages of the job is more than the maximum allowable number of sheets of stapling  The  odd stack is neither stapled           same as 0 above but the odd stack is stapled     The STPC command specifies the number of sheets that the stapler  finisher  staples a  job  This command does not execute stapling therefore should be used with the STPL   staple  command     For more simplified explanation on the staple count  here is an example     To print a 50 page job using a DF 31 finisher  20 pages stapler      STPC parameter Stapling operation   Morm 20 sheets  20 sheets  and 10 sheets are stapled    15 15 sheets  15 sheets  15 sheets  and 5 sheets are stapled   0 No stapling occurs      1 Only the last 10 sheets are stapled     To 
83. 4   Custom 4  25   Custom 5  26   Custom 6  27   Custom 7  28   Custom 8  99   Not specified  Function    The MTYP command automatically selects the paper source  tray or cassette  depending  on the given media type  When the MTYP command is issued  the printing system looks  for the paper source which has the matching media type  To assign a paper type to the  paper cassette  use the operator panel or the FRPO          X7 commands     For the MTYP command to work  the automatic cassette switching mode must be set to  on in the printing system  To do this  command   R  PSRC 100  EXIT   For details  see the PSRC  set paper source  command section in this manual        To ensure that the paper having the correct size and type of media is always selected  it is  recommended to place the SPSZ  set page size  command following the MTYP  command  For example  to automatically print on the plain A4 paper in the cassette one   topmost cassette   first assign the plain paper type to the cassette 1 by FRPO XI  1    then command MTYP 1  SPSZ 8      This command is valid only for the print systems that support the automatic media type  function     171       PRESCRIBE Command Reference                      File  To print on the A4 label loaded on the printer s MP tray  set the MP tray size to A4 and  the MP tray type to Labels  See the user s manual for details    IR  RES   PSRC 100   CMNT Sets the printer to automatic casette mode   CMNT Depending on the current media type   SPSZ 8  MTY
84. 7  meaning that no more permanent jobs are storable  The  printing system forcibly uses save mode 0     With mode 0  1  or 2  it is possible to print a barcode ID which is directly read by an  option barcode scanner for reprinting the job at any later time  The position for the  barcode ID can be one of the following positions depending according to the given  barcode position parameter  Note that parameters 128 through 135 allow a human   readable barcode ID printed along the barcode ID        Barcode positions  0  128               4  132        Spooling to Virtual Mailbox    Specifying 8 for save mode enables virtual mailbox spool mode     The starting mailbox value must be greater than the ending mailbox value  Otherwise   only the starting mailbox becomes valid     When no virtual mailbox corresponds to the alias given  the message display shows    hard  disk error 85  see the Technical Reference manual   and information regarding the job  which was thrown away is displayed in the error log     If JOBS JOBT pairs are nested or if they are not paired properly  the job defined between  the innermost JOBS JOBT pair will be valid     The command is invalid if any of the job name  user name or time stamp exceed  31 bytes  Note that the job which would have been placed in a virtual mailbox will be  immediately printed     Note that if parameters starting mailbox and ending mailbox do not specify a valid  virtual mailbox number  1 to 255   or if the JOBP command does not includ
85. A4 mode    360       Format   WIDE mode   Parameter  mode    0   Off             Function    The wide A4 function widens the A4 printing width in order to prevent unnatural line  breaks or clipping of graphics in cases where a document created as a letter size  document is output in A4 size  The WIDE command sets and clears the wide A4  function  The setting made with this command is initialized by the RES and FRPO  commands     Printing area      The width of the A4 printing area is set to that of Letter size      The width is increased symmetrically to the left and right      The width is always increased in the shorter direction  either width or height   whichever is shorter   Thus if the document is set to landscape orientation  the height  is increased      The printing area for sizes other than A4 is not affected                                                        Original A4 printing area  Printing area using Wide A4  Y  ER REA      Original A4   i printing area     4          Printing area     using Wide A4   Portrait Landscape       WRED    WRED     WRite EnD       Format  WRED    Parameter  None   Function  The WRED command terminates a sequence of writing data to the memory card or to the  hard disk  using one of the commands listed below   The WRED command can be renamed to a string of ASCII characters if necessary  For  details  refer to the RWER T or RWRF T command  See page 248 or 256     Related command    RWER 5  RWER W  RWRF W    361       PRESCRIBE Comma
86. ALL                                                                                        File  IRI RES  UNIT     SLS  457  CMNT Requires BX and SCREEN macros   CMNT See ENDM command page   AP 9  3  CALL BX   AP 7  4  CALL 5 BX   AP 5  5  CALL 9 BX   AP 8  6  CALL SCREEN  2 2  1 7   AP 8 6  7   EXT  Narrow   L   EXT  screen    AP 5 9  CALL SCREEN  8 2 1 2   AP 8 10   EXT  Wide screen    PAGE   EXIT   Printout        L JL JL 1  LL JE TE TE JEJE IE TE      Narrow  screen    Wide screen    45       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CCPY     Carbon CoPY    46    Format  CCPY mode   Parameter  mode   E   enable carbon copy  D   disable carbon copy  Function    The CCPY command continuously executes different automacros using different paper  sources  enabling to apply the different form overlay using the different paper type to a  document to be carbon copied  similarly to hand writing carbon copy forms  The CCPY  statement should be terminated with the ENDC command     The macro and paper source for each form should be described following the CCPY  command in a separate line using the PSRC and AMCR command  and terminated by  the TERM command  For example  the second line in the following example is applied  to the first page of the document and executes the CROPMARK macro printing the page  on the paper fed from cassette  2  The third line applies to the second page of the  document  and so on  It is possible to add as many lines as required to match the number  of pages of the do
87. BE Command Reference    RVCL     ReceiVe CoLor raster data    238    Format    RVCL  compression mode    length  data     Parameters    compression mode     length     data     Function    0   uncompressed  Default   1  run length encoded  2   TIFF  Tagged Image File Format   rev  4 0     bytes of raster data    binary raster data  OH to FFH    The RVCL command is the color version of the RVCD  ReceiVe Compressed raster  Data  command  It transfers the color raster data  Color specification must be made to  each pixel  An 8 bps color specification is used for the color data for each pixel  Also   this command is only valid for an RGB color space  Accordingly  3 bytes of data must be  sent for each pixel to be drawn when transferring color images    Although this command handles monochrome or color data for encoding  since it relies  on the active palette  the correct palette matching the print data must be used     The end of raster data must be declared by the ENDR  END Raster  command     When transferring color data using RVCL  ReceiVe CoLor raster data   always specify a  palette using the CID  Configure color Image Data  command  Data will not be properly  processed if the palette is specified using the SIMP  SIMPle color palette  or PANT   PANTone color palette  commands     If the image data actually sent exceeds the width or height of the specified source data   the excessive portion will be truncated  resulting a clipped image        RVRD    RVRD     ReceiVe Raster D
88. E     XXXX     XXXXXXXX     Program Data WRED   EXIT   After  WRED  is changed to  TEST         LAPI  PRE     XXXX     XXXXXXXX     Program Data  TEST   EXIT                                      LDFC    LDFC     LoaD Font Character    Format  LDFC font number  code  height  width  y offset  x offset   cell width  center  rotation   resolution   bit map   Parameters    font number     code     height     width     y offset     x offset     font number  integer from 1000 to 65535   Same for all characters in the font  Must not  duplicate any resident bitmap font number     ASCII code of the character  0 to 255     height of the character bitmap  in dots  integer from 0 to 3999     width of the character bitmap  in dots  integer from 0 to 3999     distance from the baseline to the top of the character bitmap  in micro dots  1 32 dot    integer from  32768 to 32767   positive     up  negative     down    distance from the left edge of the character cell to the left edge of the character bitmap  in  micro dots  1 32 dot   integer from  32768 to 32767   positive     up  negative     down    cell width     center     rotation     total width of the character cell  in micro dots  1 32 dot   integer from 0 to 65535   This  parameter is used in proportional spacing     distance from the left edge of the character cell to center of the character  in micro dots   1 32 dot   integer from 0 to 65535     0   portrait   1   upside down landscape  2   upside down portrait   3   landscape    r
89. E  TEXT      E   ALTF 1  TEXT  3        ENDM    ALTF 1  TEXT  Bibliography   N  U    TEXT  N        CALL BIBLIO    Radin  Paul      Hero Cycles of the Winnebago      Indiana University Publications    CALL BIBLIO    Neumann  Erich      Amor and Psyche     Bollingen Press    CALL BIBLIO    Jung  Carl G      Man and His Symbols      Bollingen Press    PAGE   EXIT                          Bibliograph    Radin  Paul  Hero Cycles of the Winnebago   ndiana University Publications  Neumann  Erich  Amor and Psyche  Bollingen Press  Jung  Car  G   Man and His Symbols  Bollingen Press       AMCR    AMCR     call Automatic MaCRo    Format   AMCR mode   repeat count  macro name  parameter        Parameters  mode     E   Enable automatic macro  Save and retain current printing parameters  T   Enable automatic macro  Do not save current printing parameters  D   Disable automatic macro    repeat count   number of times the macro is executed                          name defined by the MCRO command    parameter     values given to the dummy parameters in the macro definition    Function    The AMCR command enables the automatic macro  overlay   It automatically executes  the macro defined by a MCRO command each time a page is printed  For example  it  would be used to print multiple copies of the same form  filled in with different text     The AMCR command closely resembles the CALL command  therefore  the user should  refer to the section on the CALL command for further information     Whe
90. ESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout 2      eus          Ex       CE      pror oed  LI                 File 3    To print multiple Macro PDF barcodes beyond the current page  In the example below   the fourth line XBCP 19 has no coordinating parameters specified  This allows the first  segment barcode of the ensuing PDF data to be positioned at the current cursor position  and the remaining data on the subsequent pages if there are data beyond the first page   The PAGE command on the sixth line starts the new page  The combinations of MZP  and ENDB allow the second and third PDF barcodes printed at the specific coordinates  on the following page      IR  RES    XBCP 0 1    XBCP 17   TrnOvr0     XBCP 19    XBAR  large data such as 3000 bytes  ENDB   PAGE    ZP 1 2  ENDB    ZP 4 4  ENDB    EXIT                    388       XBCP 19    Printout 3    First page       Second page       389       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBUF     define a BUFfer name    390    Format    XBUF buffer name      data length     Parameters    buffer name           data string   ENDB     name of the buffer that contains XBAR data    data length     length of data in bytes  terminated wi    data string     th a semicolon    data to be encoded  terminated with a semicolon immediately followed by an ENDB  command  256 international characters or binary data     Function    The XBUF command defines undefines a buffer that contains actual data for the two    dimensional barcodes     The buffer name can 
91. Function  The NEWP command empties the current path and starts a new path  A path construction  ends with the CLSP  CLoSe Path  command or with any painting operator that paints the  path or draws a line along it  STRK  FILL    For a full description of path  refer to Chapter 1 of the Technical Reference manual   File        RES  UNIT      NEWP   PMZP  S  5252  PDRP 1   2  3 4 0  Slp 2   3  0   STRK  CMNT Stroking the path   NEWP   PMZP 10  5   PDRE 1     2  3  0   L  zy  3  0  GPAT  5  FILL 1  CMNT Filling the path   PAGE  EXIT   Printout  Related Commands    CLSP  FILL  STRK    175       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    OTRY     select paper Output TRaY    176    Format  OTAY tray   Parameter  tray   1   printing system   s face down output tray  2   face up output tray of the printing system or the option stacker  3   face down output tray of the option stacker  4   face up output tray of the option stacker  subtray   5  job separator  7   face down output tray of option stacher  subtray   11   face down output tray of the option mailbox 1  12   face up output tray of the option mailbox 1  13   face down output tray of the option mailbox  all trays   14   face up output tray of the option mailbox  all trays   21   face down output tray of the option mailbox 2  22   face up output tray of the option mailbox 2  31   face down output tray of the option mailbox 3  32   face up output tray of the option mailbox 3  41   face down output tray of the option mailbox 4  42   face up o
92. Home    Related Commands    MAP  MZP  MRPA    MRP    167       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MRPA     Move to Relative Position specified by  Angle    168    Format    MRPA distance  angle     Parameters    distance     angle     Function    File    distance to move    angle    in degree  measured clockwise from the vertical    The MRPA command moves the cursor from its current position across a specified  distance using a specified angle  The distance is measured in the units designated by the  UNIT command     The MRPA command is ignored in the path mode graphics  To move to a relative  position specifying angle in a path construction  use the PMRA  in Path  Move to  Relative position by Angle  command              RES  UNIT C        CMNT Numbers indicate cursor movement   SFNT  Helvetica Bd                                          AP 6  12  CIR 1  TEXT  1    RPA 2  60  CIR 1  TEXT  2    RPA 2  120  CIR 1  TEXT  3    RPA 2  180  CIR 1  TEXT  4    RPA 2  240  CIR 1  TEXT  5    RPA 2  300  CIR 1  TEX rors  PAGE    EXIT        Printout    Related Commands    MAP  MRP  MZP    MRPA    169       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MSTK     select Mailbox STacKer    170    Format   MSTK  tray  tray        or MSTK 0   Parameter  tray    number from 1 to the maximum  Function    File    The MSTK command is valid only when the option sorter is installed with the printing  system  It instructs the printing system to deliver printed pages in the mailbox mode  In  the mailbox mode  the prin
93. IBE Command Reference    218    Sample       12345X8PUL EN  TER LANGUAGE PCL    E  amp 11G  amp 11X  amp 1  0S  amp 1002a4d1e42F    amp llH  t300R  p0        0      232         399Y  b2M   r1A   ml           n   rB   p 1Y   ib  rlA  b3  W     rB  p 1Y      D1592X   r1A  bi6      rB  p232X  ri  A  b23W          rB  p lY  p1280X  SFElA  b5W        YB  p 1Y  p1592  X  rilA  b24W      Lecce SEB  p232X    rlA  b22W        1  IB   p lY  pl  280X  rlA  b5W     eee FYB   D 1Y      1584     r1     b248  Visual NETS tye  32X  rlA  b24W      SW  2     IB            258                eset  n  r    Sonore    4              rB    p 1Y  p1280X  z  1A  b5W        rB      p 1Y  p1584X    riA  b27W           22     EB  p232X        RES     RESet    Format       Parameter    Function    None    RES    The RES command causes a page break and resets parameters as indicated below     Some reset values can also be changed by the FRPO command  For these  the factory  reset value is given  followed by the FRPO parameters that can be used to change this  value in parenthesis     In HP 7475A emulation  the RES command resets the printer environment in the same  manner as the KC GL DF instruction  Refer to section HP 7550A Emulation  KC GL    Mode 8  of the Technical Reference manual     The RES command does not       delete permanent macros or permanent fonts from memory     delete positions or fonts stored by the SCP and SCF commands    reset font attributes set by the SFA command    change any value
94. L     Return to Previous PaLette    Format  RPPL    Parameter  None   Function  The RPPL command restores the color palette most recently saved by a SCPL  save  current palette  command  A color palette restored using the RPPL command  immediately becomes active   If the saved palette does not exist  this command is ignored    File and Printout    See SCPL on page 277     231       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RPU     Return to Previous Unit    Format  RPU    Parameter  None   Function  The RPU command brings the unit of measurement  inches  centimeters  points  or dots   as specified by the UNIT command  back to the unit saved by the SCU  save current  unit  command    File Printout  See SCU on page 282    Related command  SCU    232       RTTX     RoTate Text    RTIX    Format  RTTX angle     string       U option     Parameters  angle   angle of rotation in degrees  string   character string  U option   Underline text  Function  Taking the normal output angle for text as zero  the RTTX command rotates a character  string around its starting point by the angle of rotation specified   After this command is executed  text output returns to original orientation   This command is ignored if the current font is a bitmap font   File    IR  RES  PSRC 1        SFNT  Helvetica   10                         December 21      ZP 3  3    RIIX 155 ee Leo  23   August 22     RTTX 45          Cancer  22   July 22              75  T     Gemini  21   June 21     RTIX L105       Taurus  20  
95. OX    42           Format   BOX width  depth   option    Parameters  width    width of the box  depth    depth of the box  option    B   Leave the cursor unmoved  Default    H   Move the cursor to the horizontally adjacent corner   V z Move the cursor to the vertically adjacent corner   E   Move the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner   L   Move the cursor one line down   N   Move the cursor to the beginning of the next line   B option  No motion  3  H option  N option  Left margin  V option E option   Function    File    The BOX command draws a box of a specified size with one corner at the current cursor  position  The line thickness is designated by the SPD  set pen diameter  command  The  size and thickness is measured on the basis of value established in the UNIT command   The cursor is moved as specified by the option  If the option is omitted  the cursor is not  moved  same as option B      The BOX command draws only the outline of the box  To fill in the box  use the BLK  command     The width and depth may use either a positive or negative value           RES  UNIT C  SPD    1           BOX    MAP 4  0   SCP  SFNT  Helvetica Nr   10                             BOX 4  2  L  TEXT  Text printed with option L      RPP   BOX 4  2  N  TEXT  Text printed with option N    PAGE   EXIT   Printout  Text printed with option N ext printed with option L       43       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CALL     CALL macro    44    Format    CALL  repeat count  macro name  paramet
96. P 4   CMNT Paper size   A4  media type   label   RES  EXIT   Related Commands    PSRC  SPSZ    172       MZP    MZP     Move to Zero relative Position    Format    MZP x coordinate  y coordinate    Parameters    x coordinate   distance from the left edge limit of paper    y coordinate   distance from the top edge limit of paper    Function    The MZP command moves the cursor to a position specified relative to the top and left  edge limits of the paper  measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  The  coordinates may be positive or negative  Negative coordinates  however  move the  cursor off the page  which should be avoided     The MZP command is ignored in the path mode graphics  To move to a zero relative  position in a path construction  use the PMZP  in Path  Move to Zero relative Position   command     File          RES  UNIT C  STM 2  SLM 2                                                                 SFNT  Helvetica Nr    ZP 0  0  BOX 40  40  SPD  2   ZP 0  4  TEXT           Edge limits      ZP 0  0  CIR  1  EXT  L  EXT   MZP 0  0       ZP 6  0  CIR  1  EXT  L                     6  0     AP      2  CIR 21  EXT  L  EXT   MZP 0  2     ZP 6  2  CIR  1  EXT  L  XT   MZP 6           PAGE   EXIT     178       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout         P 8  0          P 0  2     6  2      lt        Edge limits       Related Commands    MAP  MRP  MRPA    174       NEWP    NEWP     start NEW Path                               Format  NEWP   Parameter  None  
97. PATtern          GRAY     represent GRAY  GRRD     GRaphic data ReaD          HUE     adjust HUE       INTL     InterNaTionaL characters  JOBD     JOB Deletion          JOBL     print JOB List  JOBO     JOB Output          JOBP     JOB  print with Print options  JOBS     JOB Start       JOBT     JOB Terminate          JOG     JOG output stacks for separation  LAPI     LoaD API Program          LDFC     LoaD Font Character  LDEN C     generate bitmap character for LoaDing FoNt          LDEN F     create header for LoaDing FoNt  LDEN S     LoaD truetype FoNt          LGHT     adjust LiGHTness       MAP     Move to Absolute Position  MCLR     Match CoLoR          MCRO     define MaCRO  MDAT     set MeDia type ATtribute          MID     Multi tray ID  MPSS     e MPS Storage       65  68  69  71  72  73  75  76  78  80  82  84  85  87  89  91  92  93  94  96  98  99  100  101  104  105  107  108  110  112  114  115  119  122  124  125  127  129  132  134  136  138  140  144  145  146  147  149  151  153  155  157  159  160  162  164  165    MRP     Move to Relative Position 166                                                                                                                                                             MRPA     Move to Relative Position specified by Angle 168  MSTK     select Mailbox STacKer 170  MTYP     select Media TYPe 171  MZP     Mowve to Zero relative Position 173  NEWP     start NEW Path 175  OTRY     select paper Output TRaY 176  PAGE     star
98. Parameter    Function    File    None    It is possible to offset separate jobs in the output stack by explicitly repeating the JOG  command so that the user can clearly distinguish his her print jobs from the others  This  command is only enabled when an optional stacker is attached  The STAK command  must be used to explicitly forward printed pages to the optional stacker     The optional stacker has two modes for  jogging   to jog only the first page or all pages  of the job to the left or right  Selection of jog mode can be made by the FRPO S8  command as follows     All pages FRPO S8   0  First page only FRPO S8   1    Unlike the job offset provided by HP PJL for each individual job  the JOG command  affects any subsequent print jobs until another JOG command is issued  This is  unaffected even by the reception of a command such as RES  FRPO and SEM which  results in a reset of the printer     When JOG is issued with a job defined by JOBS and JOBT  jogging affects the  individual job  in the similar way as PJL   Therefore  JOG placed between JOBS and  JOBT is ignored  except for the first page      If used together with STPL  STPL overrides JOG  regardless of the order the commands  are issued     The example below prints 3 copies of the job defined between JOBS and JOBT  job  name  My Trial  user name  Halle Berry  date  January 12  2002  with the electronic  sorting function and deliver printed pages to the face down tray of the optional stacker in  offset mode or sepa
99. R E  CROPMARK   PAGE  UNIT C  SLM 3 6  STM 5 2   The text starts here   Printout  The text starts here   Related Command                      CCPY          EXIT           APSG    APSG     Assign Paper Source Group    Format  APSG group    cassette 1   group    cassette 2      group    cassette 6     Parameters   group ff   Number representing the group to which the cassette is grouped  from the top  1  towards  the bottom  6  cassette  as the following numbers   0   Ungroup the cassette  1   Assign the cassette for group 1  2   Assign the cassette for group 2  3   Assign the cassette for group 3   Function  The APSG command assigns the paper cassettes with group numbers  between 1 through  3  so that the grouped cassettes behave as a single paper source for bulk printing  The MP  tray cannot be assigned to a group  All 6 parameters must be given even though the  printer has less than 6 cassettes installed  For missing cassette numbers  specify 0   The printing system will automatically switch between the paper cassettes in the group  when a cassette becomes empty  When a group contains paper of different paper sizes  and types  printing will continue for the different paper sizes and types   If the automatic paper selection feature of the printer driver is used  APSG is disabled   To utilize paper source grouping  the paper source must be explicitly commanded by the  printer driver    Example    To set six paper cassettes into group 1  cassettes 1 and 4   group 2  cassettes 2
100. SCOL command for each palette are as follows                                   palette SCOL Color  command  parameter   1  single plane    0 White  1 Black   3  3 plane  0 Black  1 Red  2  Green  3 Yellow  4 Blue  5 Magenta  6 Cyan  7 White             Color assignments  using the ACLI command  cannot be made to the pallette created    using the SIMP command     The currently acative palette ID does not change     301       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    302    File    Printout                                     IR  RES  UNIT  MCRO SIMP   NEWP    SCOL 22    PDRP 2  0  0   FILL 1    PMRP  5   5   ENDM    CALL SIMP 0 0   CALL SIMP 0 1   CALL SIMP 0 2   CALL SIMP 0 3   CALL SIMP 0 4   CALL SIMP 0 5   CALL SIMP 0 6   CALL SIMP 0 7   PAGE    EXIT     C     2     SIMP 3     2     0     0      2           SIR    SIR     Set Image Refinement level    Format   SIR level   Parameter  level    0   Off   2   On  Medium   Function    The SIR command accesses different levels of Kyocera Image Refinement  KIR   The  image refinement level remains in effect until the printing system receives a RES  command or a different SIR command  The default value is On     Refer to the User s Manual for details about how to obtain the optimum level of the  image refinement     File            SIR 0     CMNT KIR is off     EXIT        303       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SLJN     Set Line JoiN    304    Format  SLJN mode   Parameter  mode   line join mode   1   Beveled join  2   Mitered join  3   Ro
101. T C   CMNT Tree Diagram   STM 8  SLM 8   AP 0  0  DAP 2   AP 0  1  DAP 2   AP 0  1  DAP 2   AP 0  2  DAP 2   AP 0  2  DAP 2   AP 0  3  DAP 2   AP 2  0 5  DAP  AP 2  1 5  DAP  AP 2  1 5  DAP  AP 2  2 5  DAP  AP 4  1  DAP 6   AP 4  2  DAP 6    PAGE  EXIT                        A      PB           BO p opo o       O1 ND ON   HO         O1 O1                           qs  1    Se  gt   Ne          lt      Se Ne                73       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    74       DELF     DELete Font    Format       Parameter    font number     DELF font number      number identifying the font to be deleted    Function    DELF    The DELF command deletes any designated non resident font from the printing system   s  memory  This enables the user to make room for new fonts  macros  and graphics     The printing system   s memory is large but not unlimited  and judicious use of the DELF  command may prevent memory overflow   If a memory overflow occurs  the printing  system gives an overflow warning message   The amount of memory still available can  be viewed on a status page  available by executing the STAT command                                                                          File  IR  UNIT P  SLS 16   SFNT  Helvetica Bd   15  2000  277  1 5  0   SFNT  Helvetica   15  2001  277  1   5   FONT 2000  TEXT  1  FAREWELL TO    E   FONT 2001  TEXT  ITALICS   N   TEXT  N   DELF 2001   FONT 2000  TEXT  2  FAREWELL TO    E   FONT 2001  TEXT  ITALICS    PAGE   EXIT    Print
102. Type Font Collection contains  three or more fonts  the print system automatically appends  1    2    3     9     You can omit the parameters ranging from symbol set value to typeface  however  you  should not omit those font attributes to exactly select a font    The length of the font data to be written must match the specified one  Failure to do so  will result in an error  and disables you to write data    Specify WRED  command following   binary data     WRED    five bytes  are not  included in the font data length    To delete the registered Japanese TrueType font  use the RWRF D command    To write font data in the external media  you need to have the owner grant the intellectual  property right for fonts     Example     IR  RWRF     0    ENT     RSF     testfont    FontData   WRED  EXIT    IRI  RWRE          ENT    0   testfile     testfont    619    1  10  0  100   FontData  WRED  EXIT                             259       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWRF W      Read Write Resource File  Write data    260    to external device  macro     Format  RWRF     medium   MCR   macro type                 or macro name     file   name     Parameters  medium   0   hard disk  A   memory card  macro type      PRE  prescribe macro   PCL  PCL macro    macro ID or macro name     macro ID for PCL macro  0 to 32767   macro name for prescribe macro  ASCII text string up to 4 bytes   file name    file name   ASCII text string up to 15 bytes  Automatically set by the system if omitted
103. a terminator V  style   upright or italic  followed by a terminator S   0   upright  1   italic  4   condensed  5   condensed italic  weight     degree of bolding   7 to  7  followed by a terminator B      7   Ultra thin   6   Extra thin   5   Thin    4   Extra light   3   Light    2   Demi light       Semi light  0   Medium   1   Semi bold  2   Demi bold  3   Bold   4   Extra bold  5   Black   6   Extra black  7   Ultra black    115       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    116    typeface     Function    typeface as represented by one of the following numbers  followed by a terminator T     0   LinePrinterBM8 5 Roman   3   CourierBM   4   Swiss721BM   5   Dutch801BM   6   LetterGothicBM   8   PrestigeEliteBM   4099   Courier   4101   CG Times   4102   LetterGothic   4113   CGOmega   4116   Coronet   4140   Clarendon Cd   4148   Univers   4168   AntiqueOlive   4197   GaramondAntiqua   4297   Marigold   4362   Albertus   16602   Arial   16686   Symbol   16901   TimesNewRoman  24579   CourierPS   24591   Palatino   24580   Helvetica   24607   ITCAvantGardeGothic Bk  24703   NewCenturySchoolbook  24623   ITCBookman   25093   Times   31402   Wingdings   45099   ITCZapfChancery Mdlt  45101   ITCZapfDingbats   45358   SymbolPS   The typeface values for option fonts  if installed  can be obtained by printing a font list   To print a font list  use the FLST command or the control panel keys     The FSET command can be used to select either bitmap fonts or scalable fonts  It is also  conv
104. ame    ENDM   CRO COPY   UNIT C   SFNT  Helvetica Bd  14   EXT  Client s Copy   1   SFNT  Helvetica   9   EXT  Please retain this copy for  RP  Qj    2   BOX 6  1   RP 0   35   TEXT   Registered Client    ENDM   CCPY E   PSRC 1  AMCR E COVER  TERM   PSRC 0  AMCR E MAIL  TERM   PSRC 1  AMCR E COPY  TERM   ENDC   EXIT         CMNT Document to be                             SFNT  Helvetica   12   ZP 0  1 9   TEXT   David Sumimoto    PAGE   EXIT        CCPY    47       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       Client s Copy    Please retain this copy for futue reference   Registered Client  David Sumimoto    Mailing Information  Shipping Department Use Only    Client s Name  David Sumimoto    Registration Form  Please provide your personal details     Your Name  David Sumimoto          48       CDSK    CDSK     Check hard DiSK    Format    CDSK     Parameter    None    Function  The CDSK command verifies data in the hard disk  garbage collection   It deletes    garbage jobs such as page image data that were accidentally generated in the hard disk  and normally inaccessible for deletion     File          CDSK  EXIT        49       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CID     Configure color Image Data    50    Format    CID color space  encoding     Parameters    color space     encoding     Function    0   Device dependent RGB  Default   1   Device dependent CMY   2   Void   3   CIE L a b    Pixel encoding  1   Indexed by Pixel  Default   3   Direct by Pixel    The CID command crea
105. ameters such as page  orientation  unit of measurement  etc   See RES on page 219            RES  UNIT              PMZP 4  2   PARC 3  3  1  90  270   PARC 5  3  1  270  90              CLSP    SCG  CMNT Saves the graphics state   STR    CMNT Strokes the path    RPG  CMNT Restores the graphics state   GPAT  5    FILL 1  CMNT Fills the path    PAGE    EXIT        227       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       Related Command  SCG    228       RPP    RPP     Return to Previous Position    Format    RPP     Parameter    Function    File    None    The RPP command moves the cursor to a position saved by a previous SCP  save current  position  command  If the RPP command is executed by mistake when no previous  position has been saved  the resulting cursor movement is unpredictable     The RPP command can be used in both standard mode and path mode graphics                                                                                                  RES  UNIT P   SFNT  Helvetica BdOb   16   UNIT C   AP 8  8  CIR  2   RP    ake  CMNT Save this position seven times   SCP  SCP  SCP  SCP  SCP  SCP  SCP   RPA 2  0  TEXT  N    RPP  RPA 2  45  EXT  NE    RPP  MRPA 2  90  TEX         RPP           2  135  TEXT  SE    RPP  MRPA 2  180  TEXT  S    RPP  RPA 2  225  EXT  SW    RPP  RPA 2  270  EXT  W    RPP           2  315  TEXT  NW    PAGE   EXIT     229       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout  N  NW NE  Ww         SW SE  5  Related Command    SCP    230       RPPL    RPP
106. ance decreased    Default color balance  G   Color balance increased    Color balance decreased    Default color balance  B     Color balance increased            Color balance decreased    Varying color balance allows the output image results to vary  Issuing this command  resets hue  saturation  and luminosity control values to their default settings     222       RGBL    This command is enabled for all color spaces  all color modes and all monitor simulation  modes     If ink simulation is set to other than none  this command is disabled  The RES command  resets saturation to its default state     This mode is not held in the printing system  For this reason  color balance is reset to its  default state when the power is turned on     223       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RGST     offset ReGiSTration    224    Format    RGST horizontal offset  vertical offset      Parameters    horizontal offset     horizontal offset value from the absolute coordinate  0  0  for the physical paper feed  direction  in current unit  The coordinates may be positive or negative     vertical offset     Function    vertical offset value from the absolute coordinate  0  0  for the physical paper feed  direction  in current unit  The coordinates may be positive or negative     This command moves the coordinate origin by the offset  physical horizontal and  vertical directions  as measured from the values specified  The intersection  shared area   of the current printable area and the printable 
107. and Reference    DAM     Delete All Macros    Format    DAM     Parameter    None    Function    The DAM command deletes all macro definitions made by using the PRESCRIBE  MCRO command from the printing system s memory  This enables the user to make  room for new macros  fonts  or graphics     File    IR  RES  UNIT C    CMNT Print ENDM file first     SFNT  Helvetica Bd     AP 5  4  CALL SCREEN  9 2  1 7    AP 7  5  TEXT  This text is enclosed by   L   TEXT  SCREEN macro                                             AP 5  6  CALL 10 BX   AP 5  7  CALL SCREEN  9 2  1 7   AP 6  8  TEXT    SCREEN macro was deleted by DAM                                                      Printout    This text is enclosed by    SCREEN macro        SCREEN macro was deleted by DAM     72       DAP     Draw to Absolute Position    Format    DAP x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate     distance from the left margin    y coordinate     distance from the top margin    DAP    The DAP command draws a line from the current cursor position to a position specified  relative to the top and left margins  The thickness of the line is designated by the SPD   set pen diameter  command  The coordinates and line thickness are measured in the    The coordinates may be positive or negative  Negative coordinates cause the line to    The DAP command is ignored in the path mode graphics                 Function  units designated by the UNIT command   extend outside the margin   File   IR  RES   UNI
108. and terminates writing to the memory card   Note that in W mode the ICCD command is accompanied by a form feed     If a partition name conflict occurs when writing a new partition to a memory card  the  name of the new partition will be modified as follows     e Ifa partition name of 11 characters or less conflicts with an existing partition name    Snnn   nnn represents a numeric value  is appended to the partition s name    e Ifa partition name of 12 or more characters conflicts with an existing partition name   the 12th and following characters of the new partition s name will be replaced by     Snnn     nnn represents a numeric value      Related Command    WRED       RWRF D    RWRF D      Read Write Resource File  Delete  data on external device    Format   RWRF D  medium  data type   Parameters  medium    0   hard disk   A   memory card  data type                    program    ENT  Font data    MCR  Macro data    PRN  Printable data  file name    ASCII text string up to 15 bytes  Function     file name        The RWRF D command deletes data that is written to an external device such as the hard    disk     This command has no effect if the media has been write protected using KPDL or PJL     This command causes a page break     Any write information page is not printed when the file is deleted     Example     Delete macro file  TEST   which is registered in the hard disk           RWRF D 0   MCR        WT             EST      EXIT     251       PRESCRIBE Command Referen
109. and yellow to  red     Y    127       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    128    When color is other than 0  a particular hue can be shifted  The example below shows  that the yellow hue has been shifted in the direction of green indicating that yellow  images will be slightly reddish and the image in the vicinity of yellowish green will be  yellow  Note that hues cannot be set to move beyond their next hues     R Y G C B M    If this command is      to rotate a particular hue when all hues are rotated  the hues are  controlled after they are reset to their default state  The HUE command is enabled for all  color spaces  all color modes and all monitor simulation modes  If ink simulation is set to  other than NONE  the HUE is disabled        INTL    INTL     InterNaTionaL characters    Format    INTL country code  code set     Parameters    country code     code set     Function    0   US ASCII   1   France   2   Germany   3   UK   4   Denmark Norway  5   Sweden   6   Italy   7   Spain   8   Japan   9   US Legal    10   IBM PC 850  Multilingual    11   IBM PC 860  Portuguese    12   IBM PC 863  Canadian French   13   IBM PC 865  Norwegian     14   Norway  15   Denmark 2  16   Spain 2    17   Latin America    0   Epson code set   1   HP LaserJet code set   2   Daisywheel code set   4   IBM Line Printer code set    The INTL command selects a symbol set appropriate for the alphabet of a particular  country  A symbol set includes the specific alphabetic and numeric characters and othe
110. ar represents the default contrast variation  with its median indicated by the A symbol  The left side represents the lower lightness  range and the right side the higher lightness range  The middle color bar is an example  application of strong contrast to the top bar  The bottom color bar is an example  application of weak contrast to the top bar     155       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    156       Default contrast          Contrast set to high       Contrast set to low               Varying the darkness contrast allows the difference between the light and dark shades of  the image to be articulated and the intensity of control changes the difference between  the light and dark shades of the image     Lightness gamma and darkness contrast cannot be controlled hue by hue  However  since  impressions vary with hue  you need to control with care     The LGHT command is enabled for all color spaces  all color modes and all monitor  simulation modes     If ink simulation is set to other than none  this command is disabled  This mode is not  held permanently in the printing system  For this reason  saturation is reset to its default  state when the power is turned on        MAP     Move to Absolute Position    Format    MAP x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate     distance from the left margin    y coordinate     distance from the top margin    Function    MAP    The MAP command moves the cursor to a position specified relative to the top and left  margins
111. area shifted by the new offset registration  is defined as the valid printable area     No page break is caused when this command is received  The offset values set using this  command are valid even when the printing system is in HP emulation mode                 Since this command is PCL command compatible   lt Esc gt  amp l  0   lt Esc gt  amp  l  2   the  offset values are cleared to zero only by a software reset   lt Esc gt E   In other words  the  offset is only cleared by PRESCRIBE  RES and FRPO INIT commands  when the  emulation is HP                       An error will result and the command has no effect if a command format other than the  above is used  An error will result and the value in question will be ignored if horizontal   offset or vertical offset is specified as a value exceeding the physical dimensions of the  current paper size        RPCS    RPCS     Return to Previous Code Set    Format  RPCS   Parameter  None  Function  The RPCS command resumes use of a code set saved by a previous SCCS  save current  code set  command  The RPCS commands return to the code sets in reverse order in  which they were nested   File  See SCCS on page 267   Related Commands  RPF  SCCS  SCF    225       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RPF     Return to Previous Font    226                                                                               Format  RPF   Parameter  None  Function  The RPF command resumes use of a font saved by a previous SCF  save current font   com
112. as  follows        inch   2 54 centimeters  e l inch   72 points  e  inch   300 dots  300 dpi  600 dots  600 dpi  1200 dots  1200 dpi     UNIT commands are not retroactive  They do not affect values set by previous  commands     IR  UNIT C  MRP 3  3                          SFNT  Univers MdaCd   12    RP 3  3    CIR 4 353   TEXT   7mm pistol       UNIT I  MRP O  1    CIR 5 2295    TEXT    45 caliber pistol    PAGE    EXIT        UNIT    Printout    O 7mm pistol    C   45 caliber pistol    353       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    UOM     Unit Of Measurement per dots    354    Format  UOM number    Parameter   number   96  100  120  144  150  160  180  200  225  240  288  300  360  400  450  480  600  720   800  900  1200  1440  1800  2400  3600  7200   Function  The UOM command applies only to the printing system models that support the 600 dpi  resolution  It defines the unit of measurement in dots per inch for cursor movements  The  command requires that the UNIT value be set to D   The default unit of measurement is 300  dpi   For example  the cursor movement of 50  dots equals 1 6 inches   The command accepts only the above numbers for the unit of measurement  Any other  numbers will be ignored when used with this command    File       IR  FRPO N8  1  RES   UNIT C   SFNT  Helvetica Nr   9     MZP 5  5    TEXT         120  BOX 100  100    1   UNIT D    UOM 120    BOX 100  100           UNIT C         5 29    TEXT  UOM 720  BOX 100  100    1   UNIT D    UOM 720    BOX 100  1
113. ata    Format    Function    RVRD  number of data  data           The RVRD command declares the start of raster data  Raster data represents dot lines  encoded as numeric values as shown below  Each dot line is divided into 8 dot segments   Each segment is converted to a number by the same system of column weights as used in  the FPAT  Fill PATtern  command     12864 3216 8 4 2 1128643216 8 4 2 1          The first segment in the example above encodes to 7 as follows   0 0 0 0 0 4 2 1   7   The second segment encodes similarly to 192   128 64 0 0 0 0 0 0   192    In the printing system command language  the segments are being treated as bytes of  data in which the black dots are 1s and the white dots are Os  The raster data values are  the decimal values of the bytes     Each line of raster data starts with a positive integer  1 to 511  indicating the number of  segments in the line  2 in the example shown   The raster data follows  separated by  commas  Each data value is an integer from 0 to 255  A semicolon ends the line  Spaces  occurring anywhere in the line are ignored     Carriage returns following commas are also ignored  so long as raster lines can be broken  up if necessary  as shown below  The carriage return must be placed after a comma  as  follows     Bu  ds dod  debe Wo dodo hs wo Wo d Wo  X   1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1  1     There are no limits on the length of a raster line or the number of lines     Zeros can be omitted  retaining only t
114. ata will be written  without overwriting the original file  A partition list will be printed as a warning when  this happens     A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used     This command causes a page break and prints a write information page when executed     The following example demonstrates how to send data from the computer to a memory  card  Typically  partition names should be specified when writing to the card  If omitted   the partition names will be assigned automatically as follows     DataS001  DataS002     DataSnnn     Writing data to a memory card   To write the contents of file DATA123 DOC to partition DATA123 on the memory card     249       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    250    1  Verify the printing system s message display indicates Ready   2  Enter the following at the DOS prompt           C   gt ECHO  R  RWER W  A  2   DATA123    gt PRN    The message display will change from Ready to Processing  and then to Waiting   The printing system is now ready to receive data  so send the file from the computer to  the printing system     3  To do this  enter the following at the DOS prompt   C   gt COPY DATA123 DOC PRN    4  The message display will change to Processing as the file is written to partition  DATA123 on the memory card  Next  check that the message display has changed to  Waiting  and then send a WRED command  as follows           C   gt ECHO WRED  EXIT  E   gt PRN                The WRED comm
115. ault values for the text spacing  command parameters  If values outside of the above ranges are used  the command is  ignored  If a value smaller than one dot is specified for the character spacing  it is  interpreted as 0  which results in proportional spacing        Minimum value Maximum value Default value          Line spacing 1 dot 2 047 dots           0 01 cm 17 3 cm 0 423 cm  0 004 inch 6 8 inch 0 167 inch  Character spacing 1 dot 2 047 dots 10 cpi  0 01 cm 17 3 cm 0 254 cm  0 004 inch 6 8 inch 0 1 inch       Using the font mode  FTMD command   the line spacing and character spacing can be  set automatically when the bitmap fonts are selected  Refer to the sections on the FTMD  and SFA commands for additional details                          Command Function Page  SCPI Set Characters Per Inch 275  SCS Set Character Spacing 280  SHMI Set HMI 297  SLPI Set Lines Per Inch 308  SLS Set Line Spacing 311  SULP Set UnderLine Parameters 345       Font Commands    The font commands are used to select fonts  Fonts can be selected using substitute  numbers instead of a font   s specific number  It is also possible to change the attributes of  fonts and print them in a unique style  Additionally  there are commands to download  fonts to the printing system from an external source  and to generate fonts                                      Command Function Page  ALTB A  ALlocate TaBle  Assign user defined character table 14  ALTB C  ALlocate TaBle  Convert character code 15  ALTB D
116. be any length but only the first four characters count  The rest will  be ignored  The distinction between upper and lowercase letters is also ignored  For    example  the following names are all    ABCD   e abcd   e ABCDE   e Abcdxyz    the same     The name must start with a letter  but the other characters can include digits and special  symbols such as hyphens  For example  F 1 and GRY 2 are valid buffer names     As the above Format instruction implies  the XBUF command sequence can have two  other formats implementing the different functions as follows        XBUF buffer name    data string   ENDB     Note the comma       placed between    the buffer name and          As is the case of XBAR     this format allows that data length can be omitted  0  negative value  or non integer  the  comma after buffer name must be left in place  however  Then data string is counted all  characters until the program encounters       ENDB     It is necessary to have no space or          5      linebreak between         and    ENDB               The XBUF command sequence with no comma and data length specified    XBUF buffer name      is used to delete the buffer name from the printing system memory     The XBUF command sequence with    XBUF     no comma  buffer name and data length specified       PRESCRIBE Commands    is used to delete all buffer name from the printing system memory     Files    XBCP 0 1   XBUF PDF 1  25  This is a PDF417 example   ENDB   XBUF PDF 2  15  This is a test
117. c  drawing an arc  181  standard graphics  28    Barcode  barcode positions diagrammed  141  command  34  flag  35  Beveled line join  304  Block  40  cursor moving option  40  Booklet binding  38  Box  42  cursor moving option  42  Butt cap  265    C    Carbon copy  46   Character path  64   Character spacing  280   Circle  52   Clipping  rectangle  55   Code set  129  225  267  returning to the saved set  225  saving current  267   Collator  68   Color  159  262  273  277  adjusting lightness  155  color matching  159  commands  7  gamma control  155  monitor simulation  314    palette  301  saturation  15 5  262  saving current palette  277  selecting in palette  273  vivid color  159   Command recognition character  214  278  changing  278   Command start sequence  214  changing  278   Comment  59   Compression  SENT   293   control  63   Coordinates  157    Index 2    moving to  157   Country code  129   Cursor option  42   Cursor position  274   Curve  drawing to relative position  185  drawing to zero relative  187    D  Dash pattern  78  284   a list as printout  79  Dashed pattern  79  Data dump  217   ending  93  Destination image  299  Downloading character  147  Drawing rule  for fill   101  Dummy sign  macro   160  Dumping data  217  Duplex   inhibiting by media type  162  163    E  EcoPrint  98  level  98  e MPS  165  limiting values for storage  165  e MPS starting  141  Emulation  286  changing  286  End cap  265  butt  265  round  265  square  265  Ending ang
118. c sorting only   1   temporary   2   permanent   8    Print to  virtual mailbox    copy     number of copies to print   1 to 999    barcode  starting mailbox when save mode is 8    a number representing the page s  barcode is printed      0   On cover page only  1   On whole pages  2   None    barcode position  ending mailbox when save mode is 8      a number representing the position of barcode     0 to 7 or 128 to 135  See next page      share   reserved  Must be 0    job name   job name  character string up to 80 bytes                          user name  character string up to 80 bytes    time   time stamp  character string up to 80 bytes          Save mode must be permanent  2      140      job name          Function    JOBS    The JOBS command defines start of a job which is processed using e MPS  The  subsequent document is spooled in the hard disk or RAM disk   Only HP mopier  compatible spooling is possible if the printing system uses RAM disk   Electronic sorting  becomes possible in emulations other than PJL and KPDL  This command must be  terminated by JOBT as exampled in Files below on page 144    Among the e MPS finishing functions  not all of them require a hard disk  For example   using the staple function does not require a hard disk in the printing system     If the size of the permanent jobs saved in the hard disk has reached the maximum limit  while the first parameter specifies the permanent job saving mode  the printing system  indicates  harddisk error 9
119. ce    RWRF         Read Write Resource File  Format  external device    Format  RWRF F  medium   Parameters  medium   0   hard disk  A   memory card  Function  The RWRF F command physically and logically formats an external device such as the  hard disk   This command has no effect if the target device has been write protected using KPDL or  PJL     This command causes a page break     Example   Format the hard disk     IR                0  EXIT        252       RWRF L    RWRF L      Read Write Resource File  print  resource file List    Format    RWRF L    medium  1     Parameters    medium     0   hard disk       memory card  Prints a resource file list for all devices if omitted     Function    The RWRF L command prints a resource file list registered in an external device     Example   Print a resource file list in the hard disk     IR           L   0  EXIT        253       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWRF P      Read Write Resource File  set hidden    254    Format    file    RWRF P  medium  data type   file name       Parameters    medium     data type     file name     Function    0   hard disk  A   memory card     API  API program   ENT  Font data   MCR  Macro data    ASCII text string up to 15 bytes     The RWRF P command sets the specified file as a hidden one   The specified file  which is hidden  cannot be accessed from any PC   This command causes a page break     Example   Set macro file  TEST  in the hard disk as a hidden file        IR  RWRF P   0    MCR   
120. citly  by means of  the CLSP command  or implicitly by means of the FILL  FILL current path  command   File   IR  RES  UNIT C   NEWP   CMNT The 1 st path below is stroked without closing   SPD  25   PMZP 5  10        U    RA 5  10  1  90    PARC 5  10  1  90  270   PARC 7  10  1  270  90   STRK     NEWP   CMNT Next path is closed by CLSP before stroked   PMZP 5  14    PMRA 5  14  1  90    PARC 5  14  1  90  270    PARC 7  14  1  270  90    CLSP    STRK                    PAGE  EXIT           57       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Related Command    NEWP    58       CMNT    CMNT     CoMmeNT          Format  CMNT string   Parameter  string   any character string  Function  The CMNT command adds a character string  typically a comment explaining the  purpose of the following PRESCRIBE commands  The CMNT command statement will  be ignored by the printing system   Although character strings are normally enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks  this  is unnecessary for comment strings as long as the string does not itself contain an  apostrophe  quotation mark  or semicolon   File  IR  RES   SLM 2  STM 2   SFNT  TimesNewRoman   CMNT TimesNewRoman   EXIT   The CMNT command in the above program reminds  you that SFNT represents the TimesNewRoman font   Printout    The CMNT command in the above program reminds  you that SFNT represents      TimesNewRoman font     59       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CMOD     Color MODe    Format    CMOD mode     Parameter    mode   
121. close it   If the string is omitted  nothing is printed  TEXT  N  can be used to  print a blank line  for example  If the option is omitted  the cursor is not moved  same as  option B   If the U option is specified  the string is underlined  The underline thickness  and location can be set by the SULP command        The TEXT command can be used to position a line of text at an exact location     The length of the string is unlimited  except that the command as a whole may not be  longer than 255 characters  Carriage return and linefeed codes in the string are ignored        TEXT                                     File  IR  RES  UNIT C  MAP 2  2   SFNT    Univers MdCd     TEXT  Check desired options      L  U   FONT 2   BOX  1    1  TEXT    Power steering     L   BOX ly l1  EXT  CD auto changer   L   BOX  1    1  TEXT  Air conditioner     L   PAGE   EXIT   Printout  Check desired options   n Power steering  n CD auto changer  o Air conditioner  Related Commands    CTXT  RTXT    349       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    TPRS     Text PaRSing    350    Format  TPRS mode    Parameter   mode   0   ANK  alphabetic numeric and kana   1   shift JIS  2 byte code    Function    The TPRS command allows character codes to be interpreted as 1 byte or 2 byte  character code while printing using a text command     To parse such characters  the current font must supports 2 byte characters and a 2 byte  symbol set such as Windows 3 1J  19K   The pursing method will automatically be shift  JIS
122. color   performs correction on cyan color  Mode 3  display  performs color correction suited to  simulate the standard display monitor     This command causes a form feed     159       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MCRO     define MaCRO    160    Format   MCRO name  dummy sign   comment  1   Parameters  name     character string starting with a letter    dummy sign     comment     Function    any character  default    preceded by a space     any character string    The MCRO command assigns a name to the sequence of PRESCRIBE commands that  follows  up to the ENDM  end macro  command  Thereafter  the entire sequence of  commands can be executed by specifying the assigned name in a single CALL or AMCR   automatic macro  command     The name can be any length but only the first four characters count  The rest will be  ignored  The distinction between upper and lowercase letters is also ignored  For  example  the following macro names are all the same     ABCD  abcd  ABCDE  Abcdxyz       The name must start with a letter  but the other characters can include digits and special  symbols such as hyphens  For example     1 and GRY2 are valid macro names     dummy sign  normally the percent sign  indicates dummy parameters in the body of the  macro  Dummy parameters are given by writing the dummy sign followed by a number    1 for the first dummy parameter   2 for the second dummy parameter  and so on  up to  a maximum of 19 dummy parameters  The same dummy parameter can be used any
123. crosoft Windows     This command is ignored when used with DAP  DRP  DRPA  DZP  BOX  BLK  CIR   ARC  or PIE  This command has no effect for text or images     The printing system is reset to grid intersection mode by the RES command     213       PRESCRIBE Command Reference              PRESCRIBE start sequence    Format    lcommand recognition character      Parameter    command  recognition character     capital R  unless changed by the SCRC or FRPO P9 command    Function    When the printing system receives   R   it enters PRESCRIBE mode and treats the  following data as PRESCRIBE commands  The command that follows the  R  command  should be separated from the  R  by a space or placed on a new line     The command recognition character can be changed from capital R to another character   Temporary changes can be made using the SCRC  Set Command Recognition Character   command described later  The RES command restores the command recognition  character to its FRPO set value  Permanent changes can be made with the FRPO  command described in Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference manual     If  R  is used by mistake when the printer is already in the PRESCRIBE mode  the  printer ignores the mistaken  R  and whatever follows  up to the next semicolon     File           lin    enters PR    SFNT  Helvetica    Following these five  es  the printer   ESCRIBE                mode to execute  commands     IR   BOX  BOX  CIR  BOX       EXI    214    PAGE    UNIT  2  5s  Ty Aly  1    lp 
124. cter codes  The printing system must be set to the HP  transparency mode  See Emulation of the Technical Reference manual      The SFA command specifies the attributes of the current bitmap font  It can be used to  change the default attributes of the bitmap font and will be ignored when the current font  is a scalable font  The font retains its new attributes until they are changed by another  SFA command or power is switched off  Font attributes are not reset by the RES  reset   command     The SFA command has two types of parameters  The executable parameters adjust the  intrinsic character and line spacing of the font  The non executable parameters do not  change the appearance of the font at all  but they affect the way in which the font is  selected by word processing software in the HP LaserJet emulation     Executable Parameters    The first three parameters are required in every SFA command  The hmi parameter sets  the character spacing of a fixed font or the word spacing of a proportional font  The vmi  parameter adjusts the line spacing  The vmi and hmi parameters both use the unit value  designated by the UNIT command    The third parameter designates the font as fixed or proportional  Normally you should  specify F for a fixed font  example  font 1  and P for a proportional font  example    font 2      If the font mode  FTMD  value is 15  the assigned attributes take effect immediately  If  the font mode value is less than 15  some of the attributes  although ass
125. cument to print     CCPY E   PSRC 2  AMCR E  CROPMARK  TERM   PSRC 3  AMCR E  SIGNATURE  TERM   PSRC 4  AMCR E  COLOPHON  TERM   ENDC                             During the carbon copy is executed  the copy count  COPY command  is forced to be 1   To apply no overlay to a specific page  describe only the TERM command in the line  corresponding to the page  Note that the same paper source as the previous line is applied  to that line  For example     CCPY E   PSRC 2  AMCR E  CROPMARK  TERM   TERM   PSRC 4  AMCR E  COLOPHON  TERM   ENDC                    In the example above  the second page is printed using cassette  2 with no form overlay     In carbon copy  duplex printing is not possible  The paper size and the page orientation  should be consistent for all pages in the document to be carbon copied  Otherwise  the  carbon copy is cancelled     To terminate carbon copy  send CCPY D to the printing system        File                                                                                                             details       Te          future reference     IR   RES  DAM  CCPY D  UNIT C   MCRO COVER   UNIT C   SFNT  Helvetica Bd  14   EXT  Registration Form   L   SFNT  Helvetica   9   EXT  Please provide your personal  RP 0    2   BOX 6  1   RP 0   35   TEXT   Your Name    ENDM   CRO MAIL   UNIT C   SFNT  Helvetica Bd  14   EXT  Mailing Information   L   SFNT  Helvetica   9   EXT  Shipping Department Use Only  RP  Q    27  BOX 6  1   RP 0   35   TEXT   Client s N
126. d Reference    9R   Windows 3 1 Latin Cyrillic  OT   PC Turkish   9U   Windows 3 0   10G   PC 851 Latin Greek   10J   PS Text   10N   1508859 5 Latin Cyrillic  10R   PC 855 Cyrillic Serbia  10U   IBM PC 8   11G   PC 869 Latin Greek   11U   IBM PC 8 Danish Norwegian  12G   PC 8 Latin Greek   12J   Macintosh   12N   ISO8859 7 Latin Greek  12R   USSR GOST   12U   IBM PC 850   13P   ABICOMP Brazil Portugal  13R   PC 8 Bulgarian   13U   PC 858   14G   Greek Alternate 437G   14L   PS ITC Zapf Dingbats   14P   ABICOMP International  14R   PC Ukrainian   15U   Pi Font   16U   PC 857   17U   PC 852   18N   ISO 10646   18U   PC 853 Turkish Latin 3  19L   Windows 3 1 Baltic      19M   Symbol  Symbol Set S WM font only   19U   Windows Latin 1   200   PC 860 Portugal    210   PC 861 Iceland    230   PC 863 Canada French   240   PC 8 Polish Mazovia      250   PC 865 Norway      260   PC 775 Baltic      27Q   PC 8 PC Novat   579L   Windings  More Wingbats RegularSWM font only           1    66    Available only with models having Agfa fonts       CSET    Function       Symbol set    refers to a specific group of alphabetic  numeric  and symbolic characters   The CSET command summons the symbol set to suit the various languages with the  current font  The factory default symbol set is OU  US ASCII      When the FSET command is used to select a font  the printing system selects a font  based on a prioritization of the font characteristics  Among the given characteristics  the  symbol set has 
127. d in the mailbox which is specified by mailbox id  It does not  affect the alias and password for the mailbox  if any   For details on aliasing and  password protection of the mailbox  see VMAL and VMPW  respectively   Mode 9    deletes the mailbox and its contents at once  The alias and password for the mailbox is  also deleted  Mode 15 resets all mailboxes to a clean state by deleting all the contents in    the mailboxes and clearing the aliases and the passwords altogether  JOBD 15  0   0           JOBD    Files    To delete the temporary job with an ID of 28L016T50 from the hard disk           JOBD 1   281016750   EXIT        To delete all permanent jobs in the hard disk           JOBD 2  EXIT        To delete all temporary and permanent jobs in the hard disk              JOBD  EXIT     To delete the jobs stacked in virtual mailbox number 3  which has the password of 9999              IR  JOBD 8  3  9999  EXIT        133       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBL     print JOB List    134    Format  JOBL mode   Parameter  mode   1   prints    list of temporary jobs in the hard disk  2   prints a list of permanent jobs in the hard disk  8   prints a list of virtual mailboxes to represent their usage status  Function       The JOBL command prints a list of all permanent jobs in the hard disk  or all temporary  jobs  for checking the stored contents in the hard disk and to selectively delete jobs  The  jobs stored can be directly printed by reading barcodes on the job list wi
128. d prints with the finishing arrangements previously made     Mode 0 is used to retrieve and print a temporary or permanent job  The job to be  retrieved may be specified by the job ID which is given internally by the printing system   Itis also possible to specify the page ID if only a particular page is required to be printed   The page is automatically assigned and printed on a page when one of the ID barcode  position parameters of 128 though 135 is specified for JOBS  A list of job names  currently stored in the hard disk can be obtained by printing a job list  See JOBL on page  134      Settings such as the number of pages to print  whether to print barcode ID on the printed  pages  etc   for the job to be retrieved by JOBO can be made by issuing JOBP followed  by a JOBO  See JOBP on page 138      If the job name does not exist or the job is corrupted in hard disk  an error is messaged on  the operator panel display as follows     Hard Disk Error Meaning  99 The job does not exist   98 The job is corrupted     Mode 8 retrieves jobs stacked on a virtual mailbox for printing  In mode 8  the ID  number  or the alias  if the mailbox has one given  for the mailbox should be specified in  place of job name  The mailbox ID number should be 1 to 255  AII jobs in the mailbox  specified by its mailbox ID are printed at once  After printing is finished  all jobs in the  mailbox are automatically deleted        Files    JOBO    All jobs are delivered to the current output stack  all
129. d the software  See  Emulation of the Technical Reference manual        PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ACLI     Add CoLor by Index    Format   ACLI index  colorl  color2  color3   Parameters  index    integer from 1 to 255  colorl    value for red  integer from 0 to 255  in RGB color space   value for lightness  number from 0 0 to 100 0  in L a b color space  color2    value for green  integer from 0 to 255  in RGB color space   value for red green  number from 0 0 to 100 0  in L a b color space  color3    value for blue  integer from 0 to 255  in RGB color space   value for yellow blue  number from 0 0 to 100 0  in L a b color space  Function    The ACLI command adds a color to the currently active palette  This command is  ignored when the currently active palette is a simple color palette or the Pantone color  palette  If an index number larger than the palette size is given  this command is also  ignored  If a color is added to the existing index number  the current color for that index  number is automatically replaced with the new color     To add a color in a palette  the following guidelines must be used depending on the color  space used     For RGB color space  specify the values for red  green  and blue with an integer from 0  to 255  where 0   0  and 255   100   Any value outside this range is rounded to the  minimum or maximum value  namely 0 or 255  A fractional value beyond the decimal  point is discarded     For L a b color space  specify relative values for t
130. d up the values of the columns  that have black dots in the second row  32 16 8 4   60  and so on     For printing system models that support 600 1200 dpi resolution printing  the default  resolution generated by the FPAT command is 300 dpi  however  600 1200 dpi can be  selected using the FRPO B8 command  See Section 6 2  of the Technical Reference  manual  FRPO B8   The printing system recognizes a dot in the pattern as having the  size of 1 300 inch in the 300 dpi resolution  and 1 600 inch in the 600 dpi resolution  and  1 1200 inch in the 1200 dpi resolution     For an all white row  specify 0  The FPAT command for creating all white rows is  specified below     FPAT 0  0  24  60  60  24  0  0     For an all black row  specify 255  1  2 c 4   8   16   32   64   128   255   The default  valueis FPAT 255  255  255  255  255  255  255  255  givingasolid  black pattern which is equivalent to the PAT 1  command                    FPAT                                                    File  IR  RES  DAM  UNIT C   FSET 1p08V0s0Db5T   MCRO PATTERN   FPAT  1   2   3   4   5   6   7   9   BOX 5  1  BLK 5  1  MRP 0  1 55   TEXT            1   2   3   4   5   6   7   8    L   ENDM   AP 2  2  SCP   CALL PATTERN  3  3  0  0  0  0  0  0   CALL PATTERN  255  0  0  0  0  0  0  0   CALL PATTERN  1  1 2   Dp Ly 15 14 1255   RPP  MRP 5 5  0   CALL PATTERN  0  0  24  60  60  24  0  O   CALL PATTERN  1  2  4  8  16  32  64  128   CALL PATTERN  8  8  8  8  8  8  8  8   PAGE   EXIT    Printout
131. dg    mr       T     I        14     EXIT           IR     Printout    Following these five  lines  the printer  enters PRESCRIBE  mode to execute  commands     Related Commands    EXIT  SCRC    215       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RCLT     Rotated CoLlaTion    Format    RCLT     Parameter    None    Function    The RCLT command instructs the printing system to stack the sets on the tray in  alternating orientations  The RCLT command require a hard disk installed in the printing  system or a RAM disk     ard  m                   4th  2nd                                                         MR  1st  The RCLT command is available when printing using A4  B5 and letter size paper   During printing  the same size paper must be loaded into two separate cassettes  For    example  Portrait  A4  and Landscape  A4 R  would be used when printing onto A4  paper  The MP tray can also be used as a paper source                                   File             RES  RCLT  STAK 1   JOBS 0  5  0  0   TEXT  Page 1   PAGI  TEXT  Page 2   PAGI  TEXT  Page 3   PAGI  JOBT  EXIT                      LE Fl FI       7          216       RDMP    RDMP     Received data DuMP    Format    RDMP     Parameter    None    Function    The RDMP command causes all subsequent data to be printed in hexadecimal form  two  hexadecimal digits per character  until an ENDD  END Dump  command is received  or  until the printing system runs out of data and times out     Related Command    ENDD    217       PRESCR
132. dpi resolution 200 dpi resolution 300 dpi resolution 600 dpi resolution 1200 dpi resolution  efau       342       STRK    STRK     sTRoKe current path    Format    STRK     Parameter    Function    File    None    The STRK command strokes the constructed path onto the current page according to the  following current graphics state                diameter  SPD   e Dash pattern               Fill pattern  FPAT    e Line cap  SCAP      Line join  SLJN    e Hlatness  FLAT     A path itself will not place a line or graphic on a page because PRESCRIBE path   construction commands only define the path  For the path to be drawn or filled as a line   box  character  etc   on the page  the STRK command must be issued     After stroking the current path  the STRK command clears the path and moves the cursor  to the end of the path              RES  UNIT C     P 2 5       0  2 5  2 5  0  OF  2 5   P Zub 12 254 1225   2 1   241  1 25  1 25  21           0  PP2 1  1 25  1 25  2 1       1 25  1228  2 1              343       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Related Commands    FILL  NEWP    344       SULP    SULP     Set UnderLine Parameters    Format    SULP distance  thickness     Parameters    distance     thickness     Function    File    distance below the baseline    thickness of the underline    The SULP command sets the thickness of any subsequent underlining as well as the  distance below the baseline  in the unit value designated by the UNIT command  The  distance parame
133. e 52  CLIP     CLIP current path 54  CLPR     CLiP Rectangular area 55  CLSP     CLoSe Path 57  CMNT     CoMmeNT 59  CMOD     Color MODe 60  COPY     set number of COPIES 61  CPAL     Control PALette 63  CPTH     Character PaTH 64    Contents   i    Contents   ii    CSET     Change symbol SET by symbol set ID       CSTK     select Collator STacKer          CTXT     print Centered TeXT  DAF     Delete All Fonts          DAM     Delete All Macros  DAP     Draw to Absolute Position       DELF     DELete Font       DELM     DELete Macro       DPAT     select Dashed PATtern          DRP     Draw to Relative Position  DRPA     Draw to Relative Position specified by Angle          DUPX     select deselect DUPleX mode  DXPG     select DupleX PaGe side       DZP     Draw to Zero relative Position       EMCR     Enable MaCRo depending on paper source          ENDB     END a two dimensional Barcode string       ENDC     END carbon Copy  ENDD     END Dump          ENDM     END Macro  ENDR     END Raster data       EPL     select EcoPrint Level       EXIT     EXIT from PRESCRIBE mode          FDIR     MP tray Feed DIRection       FILL     FILL closed path  FLAT     set FLATness          FLST     print Font LiST  FOLD     FOLD printed pages          FONT     change current FONT  FPAT     generate Fill PATtern          FRPO     Firmware RePrOgram       FRPO INIT     FRPO INITialize  FSET     change current Font SETting by characteristic          FTMD     bitmap FonT MoDe  GPAT     set Gray 
134. e SCAP command determines the shape of line ends  or a line cap  in a path where  they are finally stroked  The default caps is butt caps  2      Square caps have square ends which extend one half of a line width beyond the  endpoints of the line  Butt caps are similar to square caps but the caps are flash with the  endpoints and do not extend beyond them  Round caps end the lines with semicircular  caps with diameters identical to the line width     File             Square caps  default   Sa  Butt caps       1    Round caps                      UNIT C  SPD  5    NEWP  CMNT Round capped on every  SCAP 3    PMZP 6  6    SCP  SCP    PDRP 1   1  RPP    PDRP 1  1  RPP    PDRP 5  0    STRK    PAGE  EXIT     nd     265       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout       266       SCCS    SCCS     Save Current Code Set    Format    SCCS     Parameter    Function    File    None    The SCCS command instructs the printing system to remember the code set of the  current font  This command may be used in conjunction with a SCF  save current font   command to prevent the font from losing the current code set after a command operation  has been made  even if the command changes the code set  macro  etc       To return to the saved code set later  use the RPCS  return to previous code set   command  In the case of using the SCCS command together with a SCF command  it is  recommended that the RPCS command be used with a RPF command     The current code set can be saved up to eight times us
135. e a valid    141       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    142    Files    virtual mailbox specification  See JOBP on page 138    the job in question will not be  saved to any virtual mailbox and no error will be displayed     While jobs are being stacked on a virtual mailbox  a message indicating that jobs are  being stacked on virtual mailboxes  when the VMB compatible printer driver is being  used  will be displayed on the message display instead of Processing     To print 25 copies of the job named Project report  with user name  T  Anderson  and time stamp of July 29  2002  The job is saved in HP mode           JOBS 0 25 0 0 0    Project report l     T  Anderson     07 29 02     EXIT        To print 3 copies of the job named Beauty parlor list with  user name   Salt Lake and time stamp of January 12  2002  The job is  saved in permanent mode     IR    JOBS 2 3 2 2 0  Beauty parlor list    Saltlake   01 12 02    EXT  Page 1        PAGE   EXT  Page 2       PAGE   EXT  Page 3                                    To print one copy of the job named  nventory List 2002 with user name  Susan and time stamp of February 12  2002  The job is saved in temporary mode     IR    JOBS 1 1 1 0 0  Inventory List 2002      Susan    02 12 02    EXT  Page 1        PAGE   EXT  Page 2               U  D  Q            uas d    EXT  Page 3                     U  D  Q                 JOBT   EXIT     1       To stack the jobs between JOBS and JOBT on the virtual  mailbox named Sales        IR  JOBS 8  3
136. e limits of the paper        Example    NEWP     PMZP 1 5  3 5    PCZP 4 5  1 8  525  555  8   345   STRK        4 5  1 5      8  3 5     Current position  1 5  3 5        5 5  5 5     187       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File    IR  RES  UNIT C   PMZP 3  6    PCZP 11  3  2      9  6   STRK    PAGE    EXIT              Printout    e  2 2        11  3      9  6   Current position  3  6     188       PDIR    PDIR     set Print DiRection    Format  PDIRangle   Parameter  angle   angle in degrees  in 90  increments in a counterclockwise direction  0   portrait  90   landscape  180   reverse portrait  270   reverse landscape  Function    The PDIR command rotates the coordinates of the logical page by the degree represented  by the value of the angle which orients the page in one of four directions  It does not  change the current page orientation     When the print direction is changed by the PDIR command  the logical page coordinate  system is transformed so the margins maintain the same printable area  the area enclosed  by the margins  as shown on next page  The current position uses the same coordinate  values as the previous print direction  line spacing  and the character spacing of the  current font are effected by the new print direction as are the raster and pattern graphics     Scalable fonts should be used for printed text in different page directions  The PDIR  command rotates only the coordinates of the logical page on the current page orientation  and does not af
137. e printer s resident patterns appear on the following page     Pattern numbers 100 through 105 are reserved for selecting the expanded patterns and  can be generated by using the XPAT command  If you specify a pattern number between  100 and 105 when no expanded patterns are defined  the printer selects the No  1  solid  black  resident pattern     Variable resolution support is valid for 600 dpi and 1200 dpi models only     183       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Resident Fill Patterns  300 dpi     PAT 1        PAT 9           PAT 16        PAT 23     PAT 29        PAT 30        PAT 37        PAT 51        PAT 57     PAT 58     184                PAT 10       PAT 17   NU            D              31            59            NS S  NN           11                                                                                                                  BOK XXXXXXXX  XX XXXXXXXX  X X X XXXXXX    IK XX XK KKK KK  IXX XXXXXXXX  XX XXXXXXXX  OX XXXXXXXX  XXXXXXXXXX  IX X XXXXXXXX  x X X X X X X X X X    PAT 39     PAT 60                   PAT 12     PAT 19        PAT 26           PAT 6                                   PAT 20                   5      22720            27     ES          29920990990  292220990                           229992951                      55         56        PCRP    PCRP     in Path  Curve to Relative Position    Format   PCRP xl  yl  x2  y2  x3  y3   Parameters  xl  yl    coordinates of the first control point as measured from the current cursor 
138. e printing system s resolution setting enabled by this command is reset to default   FRPO NS    if a command which results in reset  RES  FRPO and SEM  is received   Actual resolution may be decreased to 300 dpi even though printing resolution is set to  600 dpi or 1200 dpi when there is insufficient memory because a duplex unit is installed  and duplex mode has been set or because the video memory size has been increased for  page protection     Printing resolution cannot be switched from 300 dpi to higher resolutions for the  following emulations  line printer  IBM ProPrinter  Diablo 630  EPSON LQ850     221       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RGBL     control RGB Level    Format   RGBL color  level   Parameters  color    0   red   1   green   2   blue  level    number from    10 to 10  Default   0   Function    The RGBL command controls balance for each level of RGB  It individually corrects the  gamma for each color     The color bars below represent color balance variations for each of RGB  The top bar  represents the default saturation variation  The output result for an input value is  maintained in linear form  The middle color bar is an example showing an increase in  output for the input value  Indicates y  gt  1 0 when being equivalent to the gamma curve   The bottom color bar is an example showing a decrease in output for the input value   Indicates y    1 0 when being equivalent to the gamma curve     Default color balance  R   Color balance increased  Color bal
139. e spacing commands  SLS   SLPI  etc       File    IR  RES  UNIT P    SFNT  Univers BdIt   18  2000   SFNT  Univers BdIt   14  2001   FONT 2000    EXIT              Font Guideline           IR  FONT 2001  EXIT    Be distinctive   IR  FONT 13  FTMD 15  EXIT    Use different font sizes and styles to set off titles   headings  footnotes  etc    IR  PAGE  EXIT                                   108       Printout        Font Guideline        Be distinctive     Use different font sizes and styles to set off titles     headings  footnotes  etc     Related Commands    ALTF  FLST  SETF    FONT    109       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FPAT     generate Fill PATtern    110    Format  FPAT           P   f   P       d  Parameters      number from 0 to 255  Function    The FPAT command establishes a new shading pattern  for use by the BLK  ARC  and  FILL commands  as described in a 8 X 8 matrix of dots     Each number corresponds to one row of 8 dots  The value of the number is calculated  according to the black dots in its row  counting   for a black dot in the rightmost column   2 for a black dot in the next column left  4 for a black dot in the next column  and so on     Column Values  128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1    0   0   1648 24  32 16 8 4 60  32 16 8 4 60  16 8 24   0   FPAT Parameters             To calculate the third number in the example above  add up the values of the columns  that have black dots in the first row  1648   24     To calculate the forth number in the example above  ad
140. ecified or a reset command is encountered     Note that the enlargement reduction ratio parameter is ignored unless the source paper  size and the cassette paper size does not match     The SPSZ command causes a page break  so it should be placed at the top of a file or  program  or at the beginning of a new page           CMNT Size the page as Monarch  SPSZ 1   EXIT              CMNT Size the page as      and reduce it to   4   SPSZ 10  5   EXIT                 CMNT Size the page as letter and reduce it to  98   SPSZ 6  9   EXIT           SPW    SPW     Set Page Width    Format    SPW width     Parameter    width     width of page  from left margin to right margin    Function    The SPW command sets the right margin  as measured from the left margin position in  the unit value designated by the UNIT command     If an attempt is made to print beyond the right margin  the characters are printed on the  next line in the IBM and Epson emulation modes and discarded in the other emulations     The SRM  Set Right Margin  command also sets the right margin  but it measures from  the left edge limit of the paper     File    IR  RES  UNIT     SLM 1   CMNT Emulation mode is 1  IBM    SFNT  Univers MdCd   18           4        SPW 10   EXIT    Line with   R  SPW 8   Line with   R  SPW 6        l   cm    i cm    left margin and 10 cm width       EXI         left margin and 8 cm width                EXI    Line with 1 cm             PAGE           EXIT             left margin and 6 cm wid
141. ed center position by a command such as MAP  MRP  or PMRP     The length of the string is unlimited  except that the command as a whole may not be  longer than 255 characters  Carriage return and linefeed codes in the string are ignored     IR  RES  SLPI 3  SFNT  Helvetica Bd   16   MAP 4  1   CTXT  NEWS    L  U   SFNT  TimesNewRoman It   16   CTXT  Unforgettable Holidays in Sydney   L             For 6 Days Only at  1000                                       69       PRESCRIBE Command Reference  Printout  NEWS     Unforgettable Holidays in Sydney  For 6 Days Only at  1000        70       DAF     Delete All Fonts    DAF    The DAF command deletes all nonresident fonts and the font numbers assigned to  scalable fonts by the SFNT command from the printing system   s memory  This enables                ZIP 2  03                                  Fr       Be    MU    DON                                   r       Be    er         Format  DAF   Parameter  None  Function  the user to make room for new fonts  macros  and graphics   File   IR  UNIT P  SLS 16   SFNT  Helvetica Bd   15  2000   SFNT  Helvetica   15  2001  277  1   5   FONT 10  TEXT    1  FAREWELL TO  FONT 2000  TEXT    FONT 2000     N   FONT 2001  EXT    AND FONT 2001     TEXT  N   DAF   FONT 10  TEXT  2  FAREWELL TO  FONT 2000  TEXT    FONT 2000     N   FONT 2001  EXT  AND FONT 2001    PAGE   EXIT   Printout    1  FAREWELL TO FONT 2000    AND FONT 2007    2  FAREWELL TO FONT 2000  AND FONT 2001    71       PRESCRIBE Comm
142. em memory  producing unexpected print  results  It may be possible to correct the problem by removing some of the downloaded  fonts or by simplifying the graphic  To determine current memory usage  refer to a status                                                    page    Command Function Page  ARC draw filled in ARC 28  BLK draw filled in BLocK 40  BOX draw BOX 42  CIR draw CIRcle 52  DAP Draw to Absolute Position 73  DPAT select Dashed PATtern 78  DRP Draw to Relative Position 80  DRPA Draw to Relative Position specified by Angle 82  DZP Draw to Zero relative Position 87  FPAT generate Fill PATtern 110  GPAT set Gray PATtern 122  PAT select fill PATtern 183  PIE draw PIE chart 198  SPD Set Pen Diameter 317  XPAT generate eXpanded fill PATtern 392       Path Mode Graphics Commands    The following commands provide a variety of path construction operators and painting  operators for stroking or filling paths                    Command Function Page  CLIP CLIP current path 54  CLPR CLiP Rectangular area 55  CLSP CLoSe Path 57  CPTH Character PATH 64          Overview of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function                                                                            Command Function Page  FILL FILL closed path 101  FLAT set FLATness 104  NEWP start NEW Path 175  PARC in Path  draw ARC 181  PCRP iin Path  Curve to Relative Position 185  PCZP in Path  Curve to Zero relative Position 187  PDIR set Print DIRection 189  PDRP in Path  Draw to Relative Position 192  PDZP in
143. enient for changing one or several characteristics of the current font  e g  changing  the upright style to italic  The example at the end of this section demonstrates this  function     Font selection is made based on the characteristics of the font  the font   s location in the  printer  and the font   s orientation  In the list below  the characteristics of font are listed in  order of priority  from highest to lowest     Symbol set Highest Priority Selection    Spacing  pitch   Point size  height   Style   Stroke weight  Typeface family  Location        Lowest Priority Selection  Orientation       FSET    In selecting a font  the printer engages in a process of elimination  It first examines all  fonts to match based on symbol set  the highest priority   All matches are next examined  based on spacing  When the printer has reduced the matches to one font  it selects that  font  Bitmap fonts have priority over scalable fonts     FSET enables the user to select a general class of font first  then specify characteristics   e g  size and appearance  later  It is still preferable to specify all font parameters to  ensure correct selection     The pitch and height parameters are measured in cpi and points respectively  regardless  of the current unit setting  UNIT      Terminators following each parameter  P  H  V  S  B  and T  can use either lowercase or  uppercase     The example below shows an FSET command sequence that selects the fixed pitch  Op    12 cpi  12h   12 point  
144. er   number   number from 1 to 20  11 to 20 are for user defined patterns     Function  The DPAT command specifies the pattern of alternating black and white dashes to stroke  the current path   The resident patterns range in value between 1 and 10  Refer to resident patterns list on  page 79  Numbers 11 to 20 are reserved for use with defining particular patterns using  the SDP  Store Dash Pattern  command  If you specify a value between 11 to 20 when no  user pattern has been defined  the path will be stroked in solid black   The DPAT command does not affect the line drawn by the standard graphics commands  such as DRP  BOX  ARC  etc    File    IR  RES  UNIT C    MCRO DPAT    NEWP    SED  2              SFNT  Helvetica Nr   10   TEXT  DPAT 21                                                                  PMRP 1 4    1  DPAT  1  PDRP 9  0   RPP  PMRP 0   7   STRK   ENDM    AP 5  5   FONT 13   CALL DPAT 1   CALL DPAT  2   CALL DPAT  3   CALL DPAT  4   CALL DPAT 5   CALL DPAT  6   CALL DPAT 7   CALL DPAT  8   CALL DPAT  9   CALL DPAT 10   PAGE   EXIT           Printout    DPAT 1  DPAT 2  DPAT 3  DPAT 4  DPAT 5  DPAT 6  DPAT 7  DPAT 8  DPAT 9  DPAT 10    Related Command    SDP    DPAT    79       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    DRP     Draw to Relative Position    80    Format    DRP x coordinate  y coordinate          Parameter    x coordinate y coordinate     Function    File    coordinates as measured from the current cursor position    The DRP command draws a line from the
145. er data by the amount of  bytes represented by the length parameter     The STR  SeT dot Resolution  command sets the dot resolution for raster graphics which  starts at the current cursor position  The SRO  Set Raster Options  command specifies  the orientation of the raster image in either physical  default  or logical page direction     If the compression mode value is zero  or omitted   the printing system simply transfers  raster data in an uncompressed binary format  A single bit means a single dot  Seventh  bit in the first byte refers to the starting dot within that raster row and bit 0 refers to the  eighth dot and continues     In the run length encoding mode  the printing system treats raster data in pairs of bytes   The first byte of each pair is the repetition count for the data in second pattern byte  The  repetition count accepts any value within a range of OH to FFH     compression mode 2  TIFF rev  4 0  translates raster data to be packbits in which a  control byte precedes the raster data  A TIFF rev  4 0 encoded data arrangement appears  below     control byte  1 byte    data  1   128 bytes    control byte   1 byte  data  1   128 bytes         A control byte with a negative value from   27 to     81H to FFH  means the repetition  count for the subsequent data  A zero to 127       to 7FH  indicates the number of data  bytes that follow  A control byte of   28  80H  represents a non operative control byte     Related Commands    ENDR  STR    237       PRESCRI
146. er value             Parameters    repeat count     number of times the macro is to be executed    macro name     name defined by a MCRO command    parameter  values     Function    values given to the dummy parameters in the macro definition    The CALL command executes a macro previously defined by a MCRO command  The  macro may be executed any desired number of times by specifying a repeat count  Note  that the repeat count is not followed by a comma  If the repeat count is omitted  the  macro is executed once     Only the first four characters of the macro name are significant  They must match the  first four characters of a macro name defined by a previous MCRO command     A parameter value consists of the characters that occur between the delimiting commas   excluding the commas  These parameters are substituted without change for the  corresponding dummy parameter in the macro definition  except that consecutive spaces  are compressed to a single space     When a character string parameter is enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks  the  enclosed string together with the enclosing apostrophes or quotation marks is substituted  for the dummy parameter  In this case  consecutive spaces are not compressed     If a CALL command has too few parameters  it is still valid  The macro is partially  executed  any commands in the macro body without appropriate parameters will be  ignored     The CALL command  like other commands  is limited to 255 characters in length        C
147. eristics remain  unchanged     Now the FSET 0P  command requests a fixed pitch  font  The method for selecting this font is based  on the change from the previous pitch  characteristic        FTMD    FTMD     bitmap FonT MoDe    Format    FTMD value     Parameter    value     Function    an integer from 0 to 15    The FTMD command determines which attributes will be changed automatically when a  bitmap font  simulated based on scalable fonts  is selected by the FONT  ALTF  or RPF  command  The attributes and values appear as follows     Horizontal motion index  character spacing  1  Vertical motion index  line spacing  2  Fixed or proportional spacing 3  Portrait or landscape orientation 4    The values 1  2  4  and 8 change a single font attribute using the FTMD command  When  the FTMD command is executed  the printer adjusts the designated attributes of the  current font  Later  if the current font is changed by a FONT  ALTF  or RPF command   the printer automatically changes the designated attributes to the values of the new font   The default value of the FTMD command depends on the emulation mode     The printer does not automatically change any attributes not designated by the FTMD  command  If necessary  these attributes must be adjusted by other commands  SCS or  SCPI for the character spacing  SLS or SLPI for the line spacing  and SPO for the page  orientation  The FTMD command is ignored when the current font is a scalable font     Font Mode Values                  
148. erminate string 256  RWRF W  Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  API pro  257  gram   RWRF W  Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  font  258  RWRF W  Read Write Resource File  Write data to external device  macro  260  RWRF W    Resource File  Write data to external device  printable 261  ata  WRED WRite EnD 361          PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Control Commands for Option Devices    A variety of options  such as feeders  sorters  document finishers  etc   are available for  print systems  The commands below provides access to the optional equipment                                                  Command Function Page  APSG Assign Paper Source Group 27  ASTK Assign STacKer trays 32  BKLT print in BooKLeT binding 38  CSTK select Collator STacKer 68  DUPX select deselect DUPleX mode 84  DXPG select DupleX PaGe side 85  FOLD FOLD printed pages 107  JOG JOG output stacks for separation 145  MID Multi tray ID 164  MSTK select Mailbox STacKer 170  PNCH PuNCH 206  SSTK select Sorter STacKer 333  STPC set STaPle Counter 339  STPL STaPLe 340                Commands    The printing system features various job storing options     e MPS  enhanced Multiple  Printing System    that utilize the hard disk  For this feature to be performed  a print job  must be defined as an e MPS job by the JOBS command  Once the job is defined and  stored in the hard disk by the JOBS command  it can be retrieved from the hard disk for  printing with various pr
149. ers except monitor name are enabled only    when monitor name value is 7  custom      Resetting the printing system or switching emulation modes resets all custom parameters    to the default states     The simulation provided by this command is enabled only when the device dependent    color space is in use        SMNT    This command is irrelevant to some color printing system models  At the time of release  of this manual  the command is irrelevant to model FS 5800C  and monitor name values  of 0 and 2 are valid for model FS 8000C     Resetting the printing system and switching emulation mode reset all parameters to the  default states     315       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SPAL     Select PALette    316    Format  SPAL id    Parameter   id   palette ID number  0 to 32767  default is 0    Function  The SPAL command selects the palette to activate from among the palettes that are  currently available  If no palette is associated with the specified number  this command is  ignored   The palette activated by SPAL is deleted when a new palette is created by the CID  command  The active palette number does not change  All palettes are deleted by the  reset command  leaving only the default palette    File and Printout    See ACLI on page 12        SPD    SPD     Set Pen Diameter    Format    SPD diameter     Parameter    diameter     Function    line thickness    The SPD command sets the thickness of the line used in the graphics commands  DRP   PDRP  etc    The thickness
150. esolution     resolution of the character  300  dpi   600  dpi   or 1200  dpi     147       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    148    bit map     Function    File    Printout    dot pattern of the character  coded as a character string    The LDFC command defines one character of a new bitmap font  It can be used to create  special characters such as the one shown below  which is defined as the         symbol   character code 43  of font 1000  Details and another example appear in   Chapter 4 of the Technical Reference manual     The resolution is valid only on a 600 1200 dpi printer model     IR    LDFC 1000  43  39  29  1216  0  1216  608  0     2  0  2  0  2  0  2  0  7  0  7  0  7  0   7   O    2  0       0       0       0      0      0 _   0    0  A   p0G   x00    0     80 2   0G   x0A   p0      0   _ 2  0      0      0       0       0       0  7  CORC    0        7  0    7      7  0  2  0  2  0  2  0  2  0                                                                                                                          FONT 1000  SLM 1  SCPI 6  SLPI 6    TEXT     T e Noe   TEXT                TEXT     rre Ny   TEXT    ZIP   TEXT    top NIE   EXIT                                                                                 4                                                            LDFN C    LDFN C     generate bitmap character for LoaDing  FoNt    Format  LDFN C  font number  code  height  width  y offset  x offset  cell width   bit map    Parameters    font numbe
151. faces Line printer   Serial  TBM Proprinter i 8192 KB    Parallel   Centimeter Diablo 630 Cassette 1 M 01 x JS  Dots Epson LQ 850  Points PCL 6   Copies Page orientation KPDL2 Ibyte code   1  Portrait B  Landscape                          Environme    STE     Reserved 80 00  Reserved 87 01  Default pattern switch     BB 00      Environment Parameters Serial Parallel  User top margin Al A2 100 00 00 00 00  User left margin A3 A4 100 00 00 00 00  User page length AB A6 100     13 61 13 61  User page width A7 A8 100 13 61 13 61  Page orientation Cl 00 00  Default font number C2 C3 C5  1 00000 00000  ant switch C8 00 00  timeout  J2 06 06  70 01 02                                336       STM     Set Top Margin  Format    STM distance     Parameter    distance     size of top margin    Function    The STM command sets the top margin  in the unit value designated by the UNIT    command     STM    A top margin setting in a document file should be placed at the beginning of the file or at    a page break     If the top margin is moved below the current cursor position  the cursor moves to the new  margin  But if the top margin is moved above the current cursor position  the cursor does    not move     File    IR  RES  UNIT C           SFNT  Helvetica Nr   18   STM 2   EXIT  E              First page with 2 cm top margin    IR  RES  UNIT C           SFNT  Helvetica Nr   18   STM 4   EXIT  E              Second page with 4 cm top margin    11                                          3
152. fect the current page orientation  A bitmap font prints text according to  the current page orientation  it adheres to the current font mode      The PDIR command does not cause a page break  so you can print text in four different  directions on the same page as shown in the sample file on the next page     189       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Portrait  PDIR 0   Landscape  PDIR 90      Current point        margin    Current point    Ss Top margin    Bottom margin    margin    Right margin  Left margin    Bottom margin    Right margin       Reverse Landscape  PDIR 270   Reverse Portrait  PDIR 180      Current point           margin Top margin  Current point         jn margin  Bottom margin  Bottom margin        gt   G        o  Eun           Right margin    Right margin       File       IR  RES   UNIT P  SFNT  Helvetica   8   UNIT C  MZP 10  12  SPD  144  CIR  075              PDIR 270  EXT   ENDLESS VARIETY AND VERSATILITY    PDIR 180  EXT   ENDLESS VARIETY AND VERSATILITY    PDIR 90  EXT   ENDLESS VARIETY AND VERSATILITY       PDIR 0  TEXT   ENDLESS VARIETY AND VERSATILITY                                                                                       PAGE   EXIT        190       PDIR    Printout    SS VARIETY AND VERSATILITY                ALIILEVSH3A ONY   1           S831GN3 SIDES VARIETY AND                        ALNILVSYSA                       SSTIONT    191       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PDRP     in Path  Draw to Relative Position    192    Format   
153. for each   RPP commands return to the positions in the reverse order in  which they were saved    File and Printout  See RPP on page 229    Related Command  RPP       SCPI    SCPI     Set Characters Per Inch    Format   SCPI number   Parameter  number    number of characters per inch  Function    The SCPI command sets the number of characters per inch  even if the UNIT command  designates a non inch unit      When a proportionally spaced font is used and the font mode  FTMD  is 0 to 3 or 8 to  11  SCPI 0  zero  must be specified to obtain the innate spacing of each character  A non   Zero specification results in unnatural spacing of proportional fonts     SCPI 0 does not change the width of the space character     The character spacing can also be controlled by the SCS  set character spacing   command     File    IR  RES  SLM 1  STM 2  EXIT    This line has 10 characters per inch   R  SCPI 8  EXIT    This line has 8 characters per inch   R  SFNT  Helvetica   10  SCS  2  EXIT    This proportional font   is printed with fixed   Spacing    R  SCS 0  EXIT    This is correct proportional spacing   IR  PAGE  EXIT                                      275       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    276    Printout    This line has 10 characters per inch   This line has 8 characters per inch     i opor t i on al f o t  r ted w i t h fixe  i    n  d                                2   0           This is correct proportional spacing     Related Command    SCS       SCPL    SCPL     Save Curre
154. from the positive x axis    Function    This command first of all adds a line extending from the current position to the  beginning of the arc  then adds an arc to the current path  Coordinates and radius are  measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  the starting and ending angles  are measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis     To draw a simple arc as specified by the parameters  the cursor must be moved to the  beginning of the arc by using the PMRA command   See the example below      The arc is drawn at the starting angle through the ending angle in counterclockwise  direction only  After the path is stroked  the cursor remains at the ending angle of the arc     File       IR  RES  UNIT C    NEWP  SPD  1    PMZP 5 0  10 0    PARC 6 5  12 5  1 5  180  270   STRK        NEWP    CMNT This program draws a circle   D   C            PMRA 6 5  18  1 5  0    MNT Moves cursor 1 5 cm by 0 degree   PARC 6 5  18  1 5  0  360    STR      PAGE  EXIT                          181       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    182       PAT    PAT     select fill PATtern    Format    PAT pattern number   resolution      Parameters    pattern number   number from 1 to 60 or 100 to 105    resolution   300  dpi   600  dpi   or 1200  dpi     Function    The PAT command specifies the shading pattern used by the BLK and ARC commands  and to fill a path     The pattern number should be any number between 1 through 60 if a resident pattern is  selected  A full list of th
155. gnated by the UNIT command     The coordinates may be positive or negative  Negative coordinates move the cursor off  the current page     IR  RI    NEWP   PMZP  PMZP  PMZP  PMRP  PMZP  PMRP  PMZP  PMRP  PMZP  PMRP  STRK   PAGE   EXIT                                        04        CO I           amp                         ES     UNIT C            2  SFNT  Helvetica Nr                              0  SPD  2    4  FONT 13            0  PARC 0  0    333  TEXT       0  PARC 4  0   2333  TEXT      6  PARC 3  6    333 TEXT     7  PARC 7  7   2933 TEXT             SLM 2     ty                       Paper  0  360    ZP 0  0      0  360    ZP 4  0      0  360    ZE 3  0      0  360    APO 7y Tite    dg    limits         PMZP    Printout        lt        Paper edge limits        3 6          7 7   Related Command  PMRP    205       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PNCH     PuNCH    206    Format    PNCH  mode      Parameter    mode     Function       number of punched holes     1   2  Europe  or 3  U S     2 2 4  Europe  or 2  U S     51   2  Europe  or 3  U S    left  52   4  Europe  or 2  U S    left  61   2  Europe  or 3  U S    right  62   4  Europe  or 2  U S    right  7   2  Europe  or 3  U S    top  72   4  Europe  or 2  U S    top    The PNCH command lets the option finisher perform punching through the printed page  with the number of holes depending on the country  mode selects either the standard or  additional number of holes for the country  For example  mode 1 selects 2 
156. grees  It draws  the first slice starting at the position specified by the second parameter  0   vertically  up   then draws the other slices in order  proceeding in a clockwise movement  The line  thickness is designated by the SPD command     IR  RES  UNIT C   MZP 10  10   PIE 3  0  10  20  30  40   PAGE    EXIT                    PIE    Printout    199       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PMRA     in Path  Move to Relative position    200    specified by Angle    Format    PMRA x coordinate  y coordinate  distance  angle     Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate     coordinates as measured from the left and top edge limits of the page    distance    distance specified in increments governed by the unit value   angle    angle in degrees  measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis  Function    The PMRA command moves the cursor to a position in a path construction  specified  relative to the left and top edge limits of the page  then across a distance specified  relative to the x  and y coordinate and at a specified angle     It should be noted that the x and y coordinates are measured from the top and left edge  limits of the page  and not from the current cursor position     The coordinates and distance are measured in the units designated by the UNIT  command  The angle is measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis     New cursor position    Distance    Positive x axis          PMRA                      File  IR  RES  UNIT C  SPD 0 2   NEWP   PMRA 10  19
157. h crosses the ray from right to left  If the  result of counting all the crossings is zero  the point is deemed to be outside  otherwise  the point is deemed to be inside the path     The way in which several filled in parts are stacked with each other to produce  transparent and opaque effects is controlled by the SIMG  Set IMaGe model  command     Related Commands              GPAT  PAT  SIMG  XPAT    101       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File             tu                    102    ES     UNIT C  SIMG 1   Drawing clusters                          1 02  L25  PDRP    5 7      1 75    0  0       Salay 2320  CSP  PAT 2        10  12  PDRP  2 6   5 35    0  0  245  22 5  42 9  412                  37    FILL   10  12  PDRP 5 7   1 75    01 0       345  324 3 5  CLSP  PAT 4  FILI   12  12   PORE 527   1 75     Or               155  10       CESPE PAT               10   T23 BDRE  5 7  1 75    0  0  0  3 4  3 1  3 6  CLSP  PAT 6  FILL   10   12   PDRP  2 76  5 355             245   295  4 9              PAT T7  EILD   10  12  PDRP 5 7  1 75    05       325      3 4   3 5            PAT 87 ELEG   1105  12   PDRP 5 75 1 755    0  20v  V5                                 PAT 9               FILL    Printout               222       103       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FLAT     set FLATness    Format    FLAT flatness     Parameters    flatness   number from 1 to 100    Function    The FLAT command determines how smoothly curves in paths are to be drawn when a  STRK or FILL comma
158. he    coordinates and line thickness are measured in the value designated by the UNIT    command  The coordinates should be positive or zero  Negative coordinates are treated    as Zero     The DZP command is ignored within a path construction  To add a zero relative line  segment in a path  use the PDZP  in Path  Draw to Zero relative Position  command     File    IR  RES UNIT C        MZP  MZP  MZP  MZP  MZP  MZP    0    PAGE     EXIT                      0                                                    DZP  DZP  DZP  DZP  DZP  DZP                                                    Ne                                       87       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Related Command    PDZP    88       EMCR    EMCR     Enable MaCRo depending on paper  source       Format           mode  paper source     print side    repeat count  macro name     parameter         Parameters   mode     E   enable automatic macro  D   disable automatic macro    paper source   0   multi purpose feeder  1  cassette 1  printing system s cassette   2   cassette 2  3   cassette 3  4   cassette 4  5   cassette 5  6   cassette 6  bottom   99   envelope or universal feeder    print side   side of the page the macro is executed when duplex printing  0   front  1   back    repeat count   number of times the macro is executed                          name defined by the MCRO command    parameter   values given to the dummy parameters in the macro definition    89       PRESCRIBE Command Refere
159. he delimiting commas  For zeros at the end of the  line  the commas can also be omitted  The following example displays equivalent raster  data lines     7  0  0  15  0  15  0  0  and 7      15    15   The following example demonstrates two ways to produce a blank raster line     1       Or d       239       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    240    The following examples produce invalid raster data lines   Wrong     0   Count cannot be 0    1  Use 1   forablank line    2  1  1  1  Toomany data values    2   1   1  Negative values are not allowed            1  Carriage return before comma     An invalid raster data line is not printed  and invalidates all raster lines that follow     Again  the following example demonstrates how to create the raster graphic on the  previous page     IR  STR 75  RVRD   0     D ON  EM  D            E Ne Ne      gt    na    lt   C   M                  lt      Ej  Nb No           PN      gt   n    Z   c             lt   LE         Ux                  D  Q          EXIT        The value 2 in each raster data line indicates the number of data which follows  The  subsequent data can be obtained by following the same procedure as explained in  Defining Fill Patterns in Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference manual        RWERD    RWER D      Read Write External Resource  Delete    Format    data on external media       RWER D  medium  data type    partition name         Parameters    medium     data type     0   hard disk or RAM disk       memory card    t
160. he lightness  red green  and yellow   blue with a number from 0 0 to 100 0  Any value outside this range is rounded to the  minimum or maximum value  namely 0 0 or 100 0        ACLI    CID 0  1     0   0     is printed in blue            2   is printed in green                         L 3   is printed in red          This line is printed in blue     This line is printed in green     This line is printed in red     File  IR  RES   DAM   UNIT C   SFNT  AntiqueOlive Bd   20   CPAL C  SPAL 1   ACLI 1  0  0  255   ACLI 2  0  255   ACLI 3  255  0   MZP 1  1  SCOL 1   TEXT  This line  MZP 1  2 4  SCO  TEXT  This line  MZP 1  3 8  SCO  TEXT  This line  EXIT    Printout   Related Commands    CPAL  SPAL       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ALTB A      ALlocate TaBle  Assign user defined  character table    Format    ALTB A  table id     Parameter    table id     number identifying the character table assigned to the resident font  from 1 to 65535    Function    The ALTB A command assigns the user defined character table to the current resident  font     File    See ALTB C on page 15        ALTB C        ALTB C     ALlocate TaBle  Convert character code    Format   ALTB C  table id  source character  target character    Parameters  table id     number identifying the character table to convert the character  from 1 to 65535    source character     character code before conversion  1 byte code   0 to 255  2 byte code   0 to 65533  or  in hexadecimal notation   xxxx      target character 
161. he next line   The distance is measured in the unit value designated by the UNIT command     The line spacing can be set by either the SLS or the SLPI  set lines per inch  command   SLPI sets the number of lines per inch  SLS sets the number of inches  or other units  per  line     File    IR  RES  UNIT C  STM 5   SFNT  TimesNewRoman    EXIT   These lines have th  default line spacing  of 0 423 cm  6 lpi    IR  SLS  6  EXIT   These lines ar  Spaced at intervals  of  6 centimeters         PAGE  EXIT                                         Printout    These lines have the  default line spacing  of 0 423 cm  6 Ipi      These lines are  spaced at intervals  of  6 centimeters     Related Command    SLPI    311       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SMLT     Set Miter LimiT    Format    SMLT limit value     Parameter    limit value     Ratio of the length through a join to the width of line  expressed by the following  formula  Default is 10  Minimum value is 1         A miter length 1  limit value          line width   sin  a 2   W   line width  L   miter length  W  L    Function    The miter limit value set by the SMLT command is the maximum ratio of the miter  length through a join to the width of the lines connected to each other     The default miter limit value is 10  In smaller miter limit values  say 3  the miter join  automatically switches to the beveled join  This switching prevents the problem of a  spike extending beyond the intersection of the path because a small angle
162. header     The coordinate system used when defining bitmap fonts with this command is defined as  follows  Note the sign of the offset value     Font Registration Coordinate System      direction    Origin   direction    A command error will result and the command has no effect if any of the parameters are  outside the given range  This command is ignored if even one parameter error occurs        LDFN F    LDFN F     create header for LoaDing FoNt    Format  LDFN F  font number  resolution  name  symbol set  spacing  width  height   Style  stroke  type face  type    Parameters    font number     font number  1000 to 65535    resolution     resolution    0   300 dpi bitmap   1   600 dpi bitmap   3   1200 dpi bitmap  Fine mode     name   font name  ASCII text string up to 31 characters long   This string must be enclosed in  either single or double quotation marks   symbol set   symbol set   numeric value   1 byte code symbol set  1 to 65535  619  Shift JIS code    J   2 byte JIS code  spacing   spacing   0   fixed spacing  1   proportional spacing  width   font width  in dots set by resolution  3 to 3000  height   font height  in dots set by resolution  4 to 4165  style   font style 0 to 32767  stroke   stroke weight   127 to  127  type face     type face 0 to 32767    151       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    152    type     Function    font type     0   character codes from 32 to 127  1   character codes from 32 to 127 and from 160 to 255  2   character codes from 0 to 255   
163. her at its  center  The job to be stapled and folded should be initiated by the JOBS command  See    page 140      With the staple value given  the pages are stapled  two  and folded at its center in  reference to the short edge of the paper     Folding and stapling         Paper sizes available for this mode include A4 R  letter R  B4  A3 and ledger  The job is  automatically delivered on the face down output tray of the document finisher     IR  FOLD 1   JOBS 1 1 2 0 0    EXT  Stapled and folded with the next page     PAGE    EXT  Stapled and folded with the preceding page    JOBT    EXIT                                107       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    FONT     change current FONT    Format    FONT font number     Parameter    font number   number identifying the font    Function    The FONT command specifies a typeface for all text that follows     The font number should designate a resident bitmap font  a scalable font selected by the  SENT command  or a nonresident font generated by the LDFC command or downloaded  from the computer  If an undefined font number is specified  the font will not change  To  print a font list  use the FLST command     For a bitmap font  depending on the font mode  FTMD  value  the FONT command also  sets the line and character spacing and page orientation to match the attributes of the  selected font  The scalable fonts  however  ignore the font mode setting  Line spacing  must be specified by the user in this case using one of the lin
164. hic data ReaD 125  HUE adjust HUE 127  LGHT adjust LiGHTness 155  MCLR Match CoLoR 159  PANT create PANTone color palette 179  RGBL control RGB Level 222  RPPL Return to Previous PaLette 231  RVCL ReceiVe CoLor raster data 238  SATU adjust SATUration level 262  SCOL Select COLor 273  SCPL Save Current PaLette 277  SGPC Set kcGl Pen Color 296  SIMP create SIMPle color palette 301  SMNT Set MoNiTor simulation 314  SPAL Select PALette 316       Barcode Commands    Barcodes conforming to various specifications can be printed simply by specifying the  type of barcode and the barcode data  It is also possible to print barcodes with check  digits added                       Command Function Page  BARC draw BARCode 34   ENDB END a two dimensional Barcode string 91   XBAR print two dimensional barcode 362  XBCP select barcode type reset all other XBCP parameters  etc  364 to 386  XBUF define a BUFfer name 390       Macro Commands    A series of PRESCRIBE commands can be defined for sequential processing as a macro   Macros are selected using the CALL command and automatically using the AMCR                command    Command Function Page  AMCR call Automatic MaCRo 25  CALL CALL macro 44  CCPY Carbon CoPY 46          Overview of PRESCRIBE Commands by Function                         Command Function Page  DAM Delete All Macros 72  DELM DELete Macro 76  EMCR Enable MaCRo depending on paper source 89  ENDC END carbon Copy 92  ENDM END Macro 94  MCRO define MaCRO 160       Debug Commands 
165. hole punching  for European countries and mode 2 selects 4 hole punching for European countries            Letter R Legal       File    PNCH    The mode parameters of 51  52  61  62  71  and 72 are valid for some copier models only   These parameters allow to position the holes in either of the left  right  and top sides of  the page by logically aligning the page in reference to the punched holes     Note that the mode parameter is valid for a finisher with the dual mode punching system   such as the DF 71  only  It becomes invalid if it is specified in a finisher with the  standard punch unit With a finisher with the standard punch unit only  e g  the DF 75    the number of punched holes is uniquely determined according to the country of  destination and paper size    Like stapling and other finishing operations  punching is done per one job at a time   Therefore  this command is invalid unless it is used in combination with JOBS  See  Page 140     The option finisher is not switched automatically by this command to perform punching   Therefore  it is necessary in advance to specify the option finisher as the output  destination using the STAK 3  command     The following example is for European countries                        STAK 3  CMNT Stack to the finisher   PNCH 1   JOBS 1  Ty  2  0 0   TEXT  This page is punched with two holes     JOBT   EXIT     207       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PRBX     in Path  draw Round BoX    Format   PRBX width  height  radius   Parame
166. ht of 0  the output image pixels will be printed  according to the raster resolution specified by the STR command     Since the command ends with  ENDG  do not insert space between the preceding     and  ENDG If space is inserted  the command is ignored     When monochrome mode is specified  the output is printed as a grayscale image     The following example uses DOS to transfer both the command sequences and the  graphics data to the printing system s parallel interface     125       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    c    gt  echo  R  STR 300  MZP 1 1  GRRD 7 0 0   gt  lptl        gt  copy  b fluit jpg lpt1  c    gt  echo  ENDG  PAGE  EXIT   gt  lptl    Printout             126       HUE    HUE     adjust HUE       Format  HUE color  anglel  type    Parameters  color   number representing the color for hue adjustment   0   all colors  1 R  2 Y  3 G  4 C  5     62M  angle   angle of hue rotation in degrees   color   0      180 to 180  default   0   color   1     6   10 to 10  default   0   type   object type  Function    The HUE command shifts all the pixels around the    color wheel    to a different point for  adjusting the tint of a color  For example  shifting the red pixels to green turns the green  pixels to blue and yellow pixels to cyan When color is 0  the HUE command shifts all  hues at the specified angle     As shown in the figure below  shifting hues can be liken to rotating the color wheel   When the wheel is rotated by 60 degrees clockwise  red shifts to magenta 
167. igned to the current 2 byte font     This command has no effect if the resident font is a bitmap font and the font to be  assigned is an outline font  or vice versa     mode   R is used to release the current resident font from the external characters  Note  that it is necessary to release the external font assignment if you want to delete the  external font     31       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ASTK     Assign STacKer trays    32    Format    ASTK trayl  tray2  tray3         Parameters    trayl  tray2  tray3          Function    Number representing the tray in the optional sorter which becomes the last  bottom  tray  in each group  as counted from the top towards the bottom tray     The ASTK command assigns the sorter trays in groups so that the sorter can be shared  among the multiple users  Each parameter represents the last tray in each group of trays   The maximum number of parameters must be equal to the number of the trays the sorter  is equipped with  By the factory default  the trays are grouped as the following table                                Group Sorter model  SO 6 SO 30 SO 60   1 1 2 1 2 1 2   2 3 4 3 4 3 4   3 5 6 5 6 5   4 7 8 7 8       5 9 to 15 9      Equiv  ASTK command ASTK 2  4  6  8  ASTK 2  4  6  8  ASTK 2  4        The ASTK command is ignored if parameters include the value greater than the actual  number of trays  If the number of parameters is less than the maximum number of sorter  trays  the printing system automatically groups the remain
168. igned to the font        File    SFA    will not take effect  If the font mode is 0  the default value in the daisywheel emulation  mode   none of the attributes will take effect     Non executable Parameters    The fourth and subsequent parameters of the SFA command are optional  although if one  of these parameters is desired  then the preceding parameters must also be specified  The  optional parameters are used to describe downloaded fonts for selection by embedded  commands in the HP LaserJet emulation mode  The parameters can also redefine the  attributes of resident fonts  However  they do not actually change the physical  appearance of the font  only how the printing system interprets the font s attributes    The rotation parameter should be 0 for a portrait font or 3 for a landscape font  The  values 1 and 2 are not normally used  You cannot change the orientation of a font with  this parameter     The symbol set parameter identifies the font s character set  Specifying this parameter  does not actually change the character set  The height parameter is measured in the unit  value designated by the UNIT command           RE  UNIT C  FONT 1  2  1          FTMD 15    SLM 2  STM 4   SEA 25 21  EY  FONT SFA  15   5  P   FONT    EXIT                      t these settings  in  ont mode 15  font 1 is  ouble spaced  1 cm     R  FONT 2  EXIT E   while font 2 is single  spaced  0 5 cm  with 1 5  mm spaces between words                                     FONT 1  EXIT E   The pr
169. ind to enclose it   If the string is  omitted  nothing is printed  If the option is omitted  the cursor is not moved  same as  option B   If the U option is specified  the string is underlined  The underline thickness  and location can be set by the SULP command     The RTXT command can be used to position a line of text so that it ends at an exact  location  The RTXT command should be executed between left and right margins     The length of the string is unlimited  except that the command as a whole may not be  longer than 255 characters  Carriage return and linefeed codes in the string are ignored     The RTXT command can be used both in the standard mode and path mode graphics     235       PRESCRIBE Command Reference                                           File  IR  RES   UNIT P   SFNT    TimesNewRoman       UNIT I   CRO PF   RP   15  0   BOX  1    1          5  0   BOX  1    1  MRP   65  0   ENDM   AP 3  3  TEXT  Pass Fail   L  U   CALL PF  RTXT  Unit test     L   CALL PF  RTXT  Integration test   L   PAGE   EXIT   Printout    Pass Fail  Unit test      0  Integration test O o    236       RVCD    RVCD     ReceiVe Compressed raster Data    Format    RVCD   compression mode    length  data           Parameters    compression mode     length     data     Function    0   uncompressed  1   run length encoding  2   TIFF  Tagged Image File Format   rev  4 0     bytes of raster data    binary raster data  OH to FFH    The RVCD command transfers and encodes the subsequent rast
170. ing  right binding  3   lateral feeding  left binding   4   lateral feeding  right binding       The JOBP command implements printing a print job which was prologued by JOBS and  epilogued by JOBT in the similar manner as the JOBO command  See JOBO on page  136    Use of the JOBP command allows to use the different settings for copy count   duplex printing  stapling  etc   from those originally set for the print job  For example  it  is possible to duplex print the print job  in which duplex printing was not originally  implemented  by commanding JOBP 2  1  or remove stapling from the print job  in  which stapling was originally implemented  by commanding JOBP 4  0      Print options 2  3  4  and 16 are valid only when the JOBP command follows the JOBO  command to print the job  For example  the JOBP command sequence JOBP 2  1  will  not activate duplex printing if the preceding job to print was assigned by JOBS     A JOBP command sequence is cancelled if the host interface of the printing system is  switched from one to another after the timer has expired for the interface     To print the print job    monthlyreport     disabling the original barcode printing option  in  the number of copies of 15                       0  15  JOBP 1  2  JOBO  monthlyreport   EXIT     139       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBS     JOB Start    Format    JOBS save mode  copy  barcode  barcode position   share    user name     time  1     Parameters    save mode   save mode     0   electroni
171. ing a separate SCCS for each   RPCS commands retrieve the previously saved code set in reverse order              RES  SFNT  TimesNewRoman   SCF  SCCS   SLPI 3   TEXT  The following line is printed using ISO 6  ASCII     L   TEXT     ABCDEFG     L    TEXT  Now changing to Ventura Math  using a different  font     L    SFNT  Univers Md   CSET 5M  TEXT  QGABCDEFG   L    RPF  RPCS    TEXT  Now bringing the previous font and code set back by a  RPF and RPCS command    L    TEXT  QABCDEFG     PAGE                                                              EXIT     267    268       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout  The following line is printed using ISO 6  ASCII  QABCDEFG    Now changing to Ventura Math  using a different font                        Now bringing the previous font and code set back by a RPF and RPCS command   QABCDEFG    Related Commands    RPCS  RPF  SCF       SCF    SCF     Save Current Font    Format    SCF     Parameter    None    Function    The SCF command saves the current font so that it can be retrieved later using the RPF   return to previous font  command  The font to be saved can be either a bitmap font or a    scalable font     Up to eight font numbers can be saved in the printing system   s memory by SCF  commands  using a separate SCF command for each      The SCF command only instructs the printing system to remember the font  It does not  move actual fonts in or out of memory     File       IR  RES    SLM 1  STM 2    SFNT  TimesNewRoman   
172. ing system  the printing  system ignores the BKLT command and prints in the original paper size  Duplex printing  is also possible by adding the DUPX command  To correctly arrange two neighboring  pages in line  short edge binding duplex must be used by commanding DUPX 2      The order of print pages can be selected by binding in either of the following manners        File    BKLT         gt   amp  binding   1  reading    1       pages from left to right         OC        gt     binding   2  reading  pages from right to left    This command is not supported by some photocopier models     The following command sequence prints a copy of a 12 page A4 document in booklet  mode  folding the stack in the middle  The printing system will require A4 R paper to be  loaded     IR  RES  SPSZ 8  5                                                                 UNIT C   BKLT 1   DUPX 2   FOLD    SFNT  Helvetica Bd   72   JOBS 0  1  0  0    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 1    PAGE    ZP 4  5  TEXT  Page 2    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 3    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 4    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 5    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 6    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 7    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 8    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 9    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 10    PAGE    ZP 4  5  TEXT  Page 11    PAGE    ZP 4  5  EXT  Page 12    PAGE    JOBT    EXIT        39       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    BLK     draw filled in BLocK    40            Format   BLK width  depth   option    Parameters  width    width
173. ing trays in one  making it the  last group  For example  the command sequence ASTK 2  4  6  is equivalent to ASTK 2   4  6   bottom tray number      The tray group setting made by ASTK is stored indefinitely in the printing system   s  permanent memory while the power is off  or until it is changed by another ASTK  command  It is ignored in the normal sorter mode           50  0   but the printing system  automatically sets up the previous tray group setting when the sorter is again switched to  the multiple environment mode  FRPO SO  1  or FRPO SO  2          ASTK                File  The following command sequence delivers print jobs to trays 4  5  6  and 7  the second  group                   SO  1  CMNT Enter multiple sorter mode   ASTK 3  7  9  CMNT Create three groups   MID 2  CMNT Send the output to 2nd grp    SSTK  CMNT Sort   EXIT   Related Commands    CSTK  MID  MSTK  SSTK    33       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    BARC     draw BARCode    34    Format  BARC type  flag     string       short  tall    barl  bar2  bar3  bar4  spacel   space2  space3  space4      Parameters   type     There are the following barcode types    0  UPC A   1   UPC A with two digit supplement   2   UPC A with five digit supplement   3   UPC D 1   4   UPC D 2   5   UPC D 3   6   UPC D 4   7 UPC D 5   8 UPCE   9   UPC E with two digit supplement   10   UPC E with five digit supplement   11   EAN 8  Truncated JAN    12   EAN 13  Truncated JAN    13   DUN 14  Distribution Unit Number  EAN   14
174. inter remembers  the spacing assigned  to each font                 291       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    292    At these settings  in  font mode 15  font 1 is  double spaced  1 cm    while font 2 is single   spaced  0 5 cm  with 1 5   mm spaces between words    The printer remembers    the spacing assigned    to each font        SFNT    SFNT     Select current FoNT by typeface    Format  SENT  type face     height    font number    symbol set  compression   shear        Parameters   type face   Name of the typeface of the font to be selected    height     Height of the characters in points  The minimum value is 0 25 points and the maximum  value is 999 75 points  in 0 25 point increments     font number   Integer from 1000 to 65535    symbol set     Symbol set  number from 0 to 65535  Refer to LaserJet Symbol Sets in Emulation of the  Technical Reference manual     compression     1 for normal character width  Smaller values for narrow characters  and larger values for  wider characters  The minimum value is 0 3 and the maximum value is 3     shear   0 for normal  unitalicized  characters  Positive values give forward italicization  and  negative values give backward italicization  The minimum value is  1 and the maximum  value is 1    Function    The SENT command selects the font which matches the fype face parameters  It enables  the user to size its height  assign a font number and vary some of the font attributes so  that characters can appear compressed or sheared  A
175. inting features such as stapling  duplex printing  mailboxing   etc   added on the fly                                         Command Function Page  CDSK Check hard DISK 49  JOBD JOB Deletion 132  JOBL print JOB List 134  JOBO JOB Output 136  JOBP JOB  print with Print options 138  JOBS JOB Start 140  JOBT JOB Terminate 144  MPSS e MPS Storage 165  VMAL Virtual Mailbox ALias 356  VMOB Virtual Mailbox Output Bin 357  VMPW set Virtual Mailbox PassWord 358       10       PRESCRIBE Commands    2  PRESCRIBE Commands    In the command format descriptions below  the command is written in fixed pitch  CAPITAL letters  Parameters are indicated in lowercase italics  Optional parameters   which may be omitted  are enclosed in brackets      Three dots       mean that the  preceding parameters may be repeated  Except for the initial  R   PRESCRIBE  commands may be written in lowercase letters if preferred     Example           5        Helvetica   EXIT        Refer to Chapter 1 of the Technical Reference manual for the discussion on how  PRESCRIBE follows the rule regarding upper  and lowercase letters     The functions of some PRESCRIBE commands are duplicated by the panel keys  For  example  the same status page can be printed by the STAT command or by pressing the  panel keys  The User s Manual provides a full description of the control panel functions     Many PRESCRIBE commands can be embedded commands within word processing  software  This support depends upon the emulation mode an
176. issued  however  this has  the highest priority if both XBCP 8 and XBCP 4 and or 5 are issued together  Precedence  of XBCP modes is  4 5  8  4 526  4 5 8 lt 6    File    To set aspect ratio 3 2 in vertical and horizontal direction     IR  RES    XBCP 6  3  2    XBAR Visit Sea World  the world famous San Diego Zoo  amp  Wild  Animal Park  historic Old Town  Tijuana  Mexico   Mission  Bay  the downtown Gaslamp District and all those great  beaches  And  as the natives know  the end of September is  the best time of year  ENDB    EXIT                 XBCP 6    Printout    Aspect ratio is 3 2 in vertical and horizontal  directions     Aspect ratio is normal        371       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 7     determine bar height    372    Format    XBCP 7  mod ratio     Parameter    mod ratio     Function    File    Printout    ratio of module height to element width  ranging from 1 to 10    The XBCP 7 command determines the bar height by a ratio to the narrowest element  width  An illegal value defaults to 3     To set the module height twice as high as the element width     IR  RES    XBCP 7  2    XBAR Visit Sea World  the world famous San Diego Zoo  amp  Wild  Animal Park  historic Old Town  Tijuana  Mexico   Mission  Bay  the downtown Gaslamp District and all those great  beaches  And  as the natives know  the end of September is  the best time of year  ENDB    EXIT              Since the default bar height is a triple of the element  width  the barcode aspect ratio i
177. ivates Jog and Job Separation if these functions  are enabled in advance  The output stack is enforced to be the stapler output ignoring the       STPL    current output stack which may be specified by STAK   For the document finisher such  as the DF 31  the MSTK command may be used to guide stapled pages to one of the  output trays as desired      STPL command causes a page break     File    STPL 3  CMNT Two staples on the left   JOBS 0 3 0 0                             EXT  Stapling Test  Page 1    PAGE   EXT  Stapling Test  Page 2    PAGE   EXT  Stapling Test  Page 3    PAGE   EXT  Stapling Test  Page 4    PAGE   EXT  Stapling Test  Page 5                     JOBT   EXIT        Related Commands    STPC    341       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    STR     SeT dot Resolution    Format    STR dot resolution     Parameter    dot resolution   75  100  150  200  300  600  or 1200    Function    The STR command sets the dot resolution for raster graphics to 75  100  150  200  300   600  or 1200 dots per inch  The 200  600  and 1200 dpi resolutions are available only for  the printing system models that support the 600 or 1200 dpi printing resolution  The  default value is 75 dots per inch     The STR command affects only PRESCRIBE raster graphics  It does not change the  resolution of vector graphics commands or HP LaserJet raster graphics     The following diagrams show examples of printing a raster graphics data using different  dot resolution     6 T p m 100 dpi resolution 150 
178. le  28  181  EPROM  245  Exit  99  exiting from PRESCRIBE  99  External media  assigning terminating string  248  deleting data  241  formatting  242  How to read data from  245  How to write data to  249  printing information  243  printing partitions  244  reading data from  245  storing TrueType fonts  246  terminator  361  writing data to  240    F    Face down output tray  334  Face up output tray  334  Fill 183  Fill pattern  110   8by8bit 110    a list of resident  184  a list of resident fill patterns  184  column value  110  Filling path  101  Firmware  11  initializing  114  Reprogramming  112  Flatness of curves  104  Font  71  75  115  269  assigning attributes  bitmap   289  changing by characteristic  115  changing by number  108  characteristics  116  deleting a  75  deleting all nonresident  71  evaluation by priority  116  font mode  108  119  saving current  269  selection by assigning typeface  293  Font attributes  290  Font list  105  printing a  105  Font mode  119  Fuser mode  162  163    G   Graphics state  227  271  Gray pattern  122  Grouping  27    H  Hard disk  141  245  249  255  257  error codes  136       Image model  298  International characters  129    J   Job  136  138  140  printing alistof  134  printing jobs  136  printing with different finishing options  138  starting to definea    140  terminating to define a     144   Job offset  145   Job separation  145  choosing first or all pages  145  separating copies by command  145    K  KCGL 
179. least one space character to the right of the left margin       The bottom margin must be at least one line below the top margin   e Itis not possible to specify negative values as margin settings     For example  a right margin setting beyond the printable area s right edge would be  brought back just inside the right edge of the printable area  In like manner  it is not  possible to use a bottom margin setting that would place the bottom margin past the  bottom edge of the printable area  An easy way to set the right and bottom margins to the  very edge of the printable area is to use a large value such as 100  centimeters      The margins and page orientation can be reset by using the RES command                                Command Function Page  SBM Set Bottom Margin 263  SLM Set Left Margin 306  SLPP Set Lines Per Page 309  SPL Set Page Length 319  SPO Set Page Orientation 321  SPW Set Page Width 325  SRM Set Right Margin 327  STM Set Top Margin 337       Margins and page orientation are more fully explained in Section 1 3  of the Technical  Reference manual        PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Text Spacing Commands    These commands control the line spacing  character spacing  underline spacing  and  underline thickness  The SLS and SLPI commands are used to set the line spacing  The  SCS and SCPI commands are used to set the character spacing  These spacing settings  may be changed even in the middle of a page     The table below lists the minimum  maximum  and def
180. ll parameters except type face are  ignored if a bitmap typeface is specified     By designating a font number for a scalable font  it can later be retrieved by using a  FONT command  If you specify the symbol set  compression  and shear parameters  together  the FONT command recalls the font with these effects intact     type face should be a name from the font table in Section 4 2  of the Technical Reference  manual  Specify the full name exactly as it appears in the table  including case  sensitivity  This command is ignored and the current font is not changed if the typeface  name is not in the table or is not typed correctly     height defines the size of the font  using the unit of points regardless of the current unit  setting  The SENT command is ignored if the height value is out of the range  If the    293       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    294    File    height parameter is omitted  the printing system sizes the font to the height of the current  font  The following example displays a range of font heights       RRRRRRRR        RRRRRRRRRRR       RRRRRRRRRRRRRRR        RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR    2 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  RRRR       16  14  13  12 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  11 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  10 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  9 5 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR   9 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR  You can assign any number from 1000 to 65535 as a temporary font nu
181. long and only contain EXC compaction mode characters  20    7       This  command is ignored if the string does not satisfy these conditions  The execution of this  command automatically sets Macro PDFA17 symbol mode     File       IR  RES    XBCP 13   BETTERDAYSINC   ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0   XBAR                 EXIT        XBCP 14    XBCP 14     enable addressee ID    Format    XBCP 14   addressee id       Parameter    addressee id   string containing addressee ID    Function    A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional Addressee ID field  The XBCP 14  command enables this field and defines its contents     The string must be surrounded by single or double quote marks  be less than 200  characters long and only contain EXC compaction mode characters  20H 7FH   This  command is ignored if the string does not satisfy these conditions  The execution of this  command also automatically sets Macro PDF417 symbol mode     File    IR  RES    XBCP 14   BAREFOOTINC    ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0   XBAR              EXIT     379       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 15     enable file size    Format    XBCP 15     Parameter    None    Function  A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional file size field  The XBCP 15 command  enables this function  Note that the execution of this command also automatically sets    Macro PDF417 symbol mode  This function is disabled in default condition     File  IR  RES     XBCP 15   ZP 1 0  XBCP 18 0     XBAR           EXIT     380       XBCP 16    XBCP 16     e
182. lthough symbol set  style  stroke and type face may be omitted  we recommend that all  parameters be used to define font selection information        LGHT    LGHT     adjust LiGHTness    Format  LGHT mode  degree   Parameters  mode   mode of lightness adjustment   0   gamma control  1   contrast control  degree   degree of saturation level   number from    10 to 10  Default is 0   Function    The LGHT command controls lightness and darkness balance based on the specified  parameters  The gamma and contrast can be set independently of each other     In gamma control mode  the color bars below represent the lightness gamma variation  using hue R as an example  The top color bar represents the default lightness variation  y    1 0  with its median indicated by the A symbol  The left side represents the lower  lightness range and the right side the higher lightness range  The middle color bar is an  example lightness balance made brighter  set to y  gt  1 0   The bottom color bar is an  example lightness balance made darker  set to y    1 0      Default lightness gamma          Lightness balance made brighter       Lightness balance made darker               Varying the lightness gamma allows the lightness of the image to vary   You can achieve  lightness variation  such as making dark images brighter by reducing low lightness areas   for example      In contrast control mode  the color bars below represent lightness contrast variations  using hue R as an example  The top color b
183. mand  The RPF commands return to the fonts in the reverse order in which they  were saved   SCF and RPF are particularly useful in macros   File        RES  UNIT P   CRO SMALLPRINT   SCF  FSET 10V  TEXT  1  E   RPF   ENDM   SFNT  Helvetica   12  SLS 14   EXIT   Computer literature is littered with acronyms such  as  R  CALL SMALLPRINT   CPU  DOS  EEPROM      EXIT  and the like  Small capitals  make thes asier to read  Compare the effect of  printing CPU  DOS  and EEPROM in regular capitals   IR  PAGE  EXIT   Printout    Computer literature is littered with acronyms such  as CPU  DOS  EEPROM and the like  Small capitals  make these easier to read  Compare the effect of  printing CPU  DOS  and EEPROM in regular capitals        RPG    RPG     Return to Previous Graphics state    Format    RPG     Parameter    Function    File    None    The RPG command restores the graphics state most recently saved by a SCG  Save  Current Graphics  command  The following items of graphics state revert to the state  saved previously         Path and cursor position  if defined              diameter  line width   e Line join type     Linecap type     Miter limit   e Dash pattern   e Flatness     Fill pattern  16 X 16 dots     Clipping rectangle   e Raster resolution      mage model    It is useful to save the graphics state then later restore it when you want to use a path for  both stroking and filling  One such example is shown below     The RPG command does not affect other printing system par
184. mber  as long as  you do not duplicate the number of a bitmap font or a font number already in use  If the  number matches one already assigned to another font  the printing system ignores the  SENT command           symbol set uses HP PCL matching code to change the font   s symbol set  Unsupported  symbol set values  if specified  are ignored     compression squeezes or expands characters in the horizontal direction     Compression   0 3   Compression   1 M Compression   3 NI    shear imparts a slant to the characters  forward if the angle value is positive  backward if  it is negative  Zero gives upright characters     Shear   NN Shear   0 M Shear   1       Changes made with SENT to a scalable font in its height  symbol set  compression  and  shear remain effective until another font selection command is encountered  To retrieve  this scalable font later  use the FONT command         IR  RES  SPO P   SENT  Helvetica Nr   10  3000  277  2   3   EXIT                 SFNT    This is 10 point Helvetica Nr    with Roman 8 symbol set  compression is 2  and  shear is  3  You can later recall this font by the  FONT 3000  command          PAGE  EXIT                 Printout    This is 10 point Helvetica Nr    with Roman 8 symbol set  compression is 2  and  shear is  3  You can later recall this font by the  FONT 3000  command     295       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SGPC     Set kcGl Pen Color    Format    SGPC pen number  color     Parameters    pen number   number from 1 to 8
185. ment reduction  323   Paper weight  162  163   Parsing text  350   Path  175  181  183  192  194  196  200  202  204  elipse path  196  filling a  101  Line  drawing to relative  192  Line  drawing to zero relative  194  move  moving to relative  202  move  moving to relative by angle  200  move  moving to zero relative  204  selecting a fill pattern  183  stroking a path  343   Pen  color  296  diameter  317  thickness  317   Permanent job  141   Pie chart  198   Pitch  275  280  308  309  characters per inch  275   PRESCRIBE start sequence  214   Presentation mode  329   Previous position  229   print density  347   Printing right aligned text  235   Punch  206    R  Radius  28  198  RAM disk  245  249  Raster  compression  237  dot resolution  342    Index 4    logical operation  331  presentation mode  329  receiving  239  receiving color raster data  238  ROP3  331  run length encoding  237  TIFF rev  4 0  237  Raster data  ending  96  Registration  224  Relative position  80  82  166  Resetting the printer  by emulation  219  Resolution  221  RGB  color balance level  222  gamma  222  ROP3  331  Round cap  265  Round line join  304  Run length  238    S  Saturation  155  262  saving  277  Saving current  274  Saving cursor position  restoring  220  Saving graphics state  271  restoring  227  separate mode  351  Shade of gray  122  Shear  293  Sorter  164  333  addressing a tray group  164  selecting trays  333  Source image  208  Square cap  265  Stacker  334  selecting
186. mmand is used     File    The following example prints an illustrated crown using the RVRD and ENDR        IR  RES  DAM  DAF  UNIT C  SRO 1                      n       130  0  120  0  5  2  68  0  132  0   56  97  T  OF 5  10  0  2145  5  0   255  255  253  0  5  By 0 70  1  D    255  2997  255 02 Dp Ay  0  0  2  07    1  7    arrer  NUHA  Soe UNS US    8  1  2  192  5  76  8   8  1  3  32  5  68  62  7  194  32   8  1  4  64  5  34  8  1  4  64    B  1  4  128  5  13  0  O  11  0    0  0  8  0  5  0  128  0  16  0    131  12  16  0  5  0  64  144  32  0         232     PrP      1    OW Dd  45              5  5    RVRD   5  0  0  Y 0  02  Sy Oy 0  24  192  D5  0  0  32  327  05  5  10  0  64  26  0  5  0  70  64  16  0   5  10 54   128  8          2 102 0  128  8  05   5  D  0  128  8  D  5  0  0  64  16  0   Se D  70 764  26  D  B  0  0  32  32  0   B  D  0  120  192  07 5  0  0  102  0  0   5B  D 0  96  09 OF 5  0  0  144  0  0   5  0  0  144  0  0  5  0  0  144  0  0   Sy Due            Oy  OFS Qj 548770  0  DB  0p  dy X136  0  0  5  0  2  68      0   5 0y 222 267      07      Oy 2        05 05  b  D  6  66  0  07 5  0  5  130  0  20   5y D Ar Gy Oy      Sy  0      IO cu 08  B  0  8        04 OF 5  0  14  17  0   0   Sy     17  9  128  0  5  0  Lo  134  128  0   5  D  16  128  128  0  5  0  32  128  64  0   5  0  49  0  64  0  5  0  46  0  64  0   5  D  64  28  325  0  5  0  64  34  32   0   B  10  64  65  32  0  5  0  128  65  16  0   5  D  184  65  16  0  5  0  196  34 
187. mory card   To read partition DataS001 from the memory                    RWER         2   DataS001   EXIT           245       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWER S      Read Write External Resource  Store    246    TrueType font          Format  RWER S  medium  font type  file name  font name  length   value  style   weight  type face    binary data WRED   Parameters  medium   drive specification   0   hard disk or RAM disk  A   memory card  font type   font type   0   TrueType font  1   Japanese TrueType font  2   Japanese TrueType Collection font  file name   file name   string of up to 11 characters  the extension  INF is added internally   This  string must be enclosed in either single or double quotation marks   font name   font name  ASCII text string up to 31 characters long  only up to 28 characters if font   type   2   This string must be enclosed in either single or double quotation marks   length   font data length  number of bytes sent as binary data   value   font symbol set value  1 to 65535  619  Shift JIS code   style   font style  0 to 32767   weight   stroke weight   127 to  127   type face     type face  0 to 32767        RWERS    binary data     Function    font data  TrueType format     The RWER S command allows outline fonts  in TrueType format  to be downloaded to  the printing system and to be stored on the specified media as font data  TrueType fonts  particularly can be defined easily just by adding the TrueType font format as binary   data     Alwa
188. n Copy    Format    ENDC        Function    The ENDC command ends definition of the CCPY E command sequence  For details   refer to the CCPY command     92       ENDD    ENDD     END Dump    Format    ENDD        Parameter    None    Function    The ENDD command ends a hexadecimal dump initiated by the RDMP  Received data  DuMP  command and returns to the PRESCRIBE command mode     File    See RDMP on page 217     Related Command    RDMP    93       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ENDM     END Macro    Format       ENDM     Parameter    None    Function    The ENDM command ends a macro definition and returns to the PRESCRIBE command    mode     File          RES  DAM  UNIT C    CRO BX    SPD  05  BOX  8    8  MRP 1  0   ENDM    MCRO SCREEN    width  depth    CMNT Draws box with rounded corners   CMNT Leaves cursor at previous position   SPD  08           SCP    RP  25   25  ARC  23   30  270  0   MRP 0    25  DRP  1  0    RP 0   25  ARC  23   30  0  90    MRP  27  0  DRP 0   2    RP   27  0  ARC  23   30  90  180   RPP    RP 0   25  DRP O   2    MRP  25  0  ARC  23   30  180  270   RP 0   27  DRP  1  0                                94           L JL JL 1  LL JE TE TE JEJE IE TE      Narrow  screen    Wide screen    Related Commands    CALL  DAM  DELM  MCRO    95       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ENDR     END Raster data    Format    ENDR        Parameter    None    Function    The ENDR command declares the end of raster data  To declare the start of raster data  a  RVRD co
189. n the automatic macro is enabled using mode E  the following printing system  settings are saved and retained upon completion of the macro  font information  margins   cursor position  line spacing  character spacing  page orientation  unit of measurement   underline parameters  and fill pattern     When the automatic macro is enabled with mode T  the printing system settings are  modified according to the parameter settings contained in the macro     Color specifications may be used within macros  When an auto macro  AMCR  is  executed  the active palette and color index number are saved and restored after the  macro has executed     The automatic macro remains enabled until the AMCR command with the mode set to D  is encountered or the printing system is switched off  Note that mode D requires no other  parameters such as repeat count     The following commands are invalid within a macro  ASTK  PSRC  CCPY  DUPX   DXPG  JOBD  JOBL  JOBO  JOBP  JOBS  JOBT  JOG  LDFC  LDEN  MID  MSTK   RDMP  SEM  SPSZ  SSTK  STAK  STAT  STPL  VMAL  VMPW    25       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    26    File  IR  RES   CRO CROPMARK   UNIT C   ZP 2 46  3 96  SCP  SCP  SCP   RP   635  0  DRP  1 9  0  RPP   MRP 0    635  DRP 0   1 9  RPP   RP 14 85  0  SCP  SCP   RP  635  0  DRP 1 9  0  RPP   RP 0    635  DRP O   1 9  RPP   RP 0  21  SCP  SCP   RP  635  0  DRP 1 9  0  RPP   RP 0   635  DRP O  1 9  RPP   RP  14 85  0  SCP   RP   635  0  DRP  1 9  0  RPP   RP       2635  DRP 0  1 9   RPP   ENDM   AMC
190. nable checksum       Format  XBCP 16   Parameter  None  Function  A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional checksum  The XBCP 16 command  enables this function  Note that the execution of this command automatically sets Macro  PDF symbol mode  This function is disabled in default condition   File  IR  RES   XBCP 16     ZP 1  0  XBCP 18  0     XBAR   EXIT        381       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 17     allow control of file ID    382    Format    XBCP 17   file id       Parameter    file id     Function    File    string containing a file ID    A Macro PDF417 symbol contains a required file ID  The XBCP 17 command allows  control of this field  A random file ID is generated when XBCP 10 through 16 or XBCP  18 are executed without executing XBCP 17     The string must be surrounded by single or double quotation marks  be less than 50  characters long and only contain EXC compaction mode characters  20    7       This  command is ignored if the string does not satisfy these conditions     The execution of this command automatically sets Macro PDF417 symbol mode  Note  that PDF barcode is positioned a half inch below the previous PDF barcode if there are  no positioning parameters exist  See XBCP 19  page 386    or insufficient number of  parameters exist  See the example in File below     In Macro PDF mode  data such as large as 3000 bytes print 3 90 column by 30 row PDF  symbols which are a half inch apart vertically     IR  RES    XBCP 17  BookOne     XBAR  large
191. nce    ALTB S      ALlocate TaBle  Start to define the    20    combination character    Format  ALTB S  table id  codel  width  height    x coordinate  y coordinate    paint mode       Parameters    table id     number identifying the character table to define the combination character  from  to    65535   code   character code for which the combination character is defined  1 byte code   0 to 255   2 byte code   0 to 65533  or in hexadecimal notation   xxxx     width   overall width of the combined character  represented by number from 1 to 65535 in units  where the width of the resident font character is 1000   height     overall height of the combined character  represented by number from 1 to 65535 in units  where the height of the resident font character is 1000    x coordinate   X coordinate of the reference point  integer value converted in reference to 1000 units    y coordinate   Y coordinate of the reference point  integer value converted in reference to 1000 units    paint mode   paint mode  0   normal  filled   non zero   line width of outline character  stroked    1 to 100 units    Function    This command starts to define the combination of characters by specifying the region  and coordinates  The characters to combine in this region are registered using the  ALTB T command  page 21   The ALTB S sequence is terminated by the ALTB E  command  If the identical table number already exists  the existing character table is  replaced with the new character table     
192. nce    Function    The EMCR command allows separate auto macros to be assigned for each of the  separate paper sources  In duplex printing  it is also possible to assign separate auto  macros for both the front and back sides of a page     The following commands are invalid within a macro     AMCR  ASTK  PSRC  CCPY  DUPX  DXPG  JOBD  JOBL  JOBO  JOBP  JOBS   JOBT  JOG  LDFC  LDEN  MID  MSTK  RDMP  SEM  SPSZ  SSTK  STAK  STAT   STPL  VMAL  VMPW    To disable the auto macro  use EMCR D  Note that EMCD D does not require other  parameters such as paper source     90       ENDB    ENDB     END a two dimensional Barcode string    Format       ENDB     Parameter    Function    None    The ENDB command terminates a barcode data string preceded by a XBAR or XBUF  command  If there is no ENDB command after data input for the XBAR and XBUF  commands  a malfunction may occur  As in the case of XBAR or XBUF command  if  data length is omitted  0  negative value or non integer  data string is counted  all  characters until the program sees  ENDB    It is necessary to have no space and line feed  between           ENDB     If the XBCP 18 command is executed  the second and subsequent macro PDF417  symbols will be output  When ENDB is used immediately after XBCP 18 is executed  it  is used alone  without association with XBAR or XBUF     For details on two dimensional barcodes  see Section 5 2  of the Technical Reference  manual     91       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    ENDC     END carbo
193. nd Reference    XBAR     print two dimensional barcode          Format  XBAR  data length    data string  ENDB   or  XBAR buffer name   ENDB   Parameters    data length     length of data in bytes  terminated with a semicolon        If this value is omitted  data string is counted all characters after the first semicolon until  the program sees  ENDB       data string   data to be encoded  terminated with a semicolon     immediately followed by an ENDB  command  256 international characters or binary data     buffer name   name of buffer previously defined by XBUF command    Function    The XBAR command prints a two dimensional barcode  sometimes referred to as  PDF417 symbol   The ENDB must follow as a terminator for the barcode data string   Note that carriage return  line feed  space and all other characters must be counted as part  of data in the data string field  If data length is omitted  0  negative value  or non integer   then data string is counted all characters until the program sees             If data length  is 0  the semicolon to terminate the data cannot be omitted   Command as  XBAR  ENDB    It is necessary to have no space between         and  ENDB       362       Files    Printout    XBAR    R  XBAR  The Milky Way is a gravitationally bound  collection of roughly a hundred billion stars  Our Sun is  one of these stars and is located roughly 24 000 light years   or 8000 parsecs  from the center of our the Milky Way   The Galaxy has three major components  A
194. nd is used  Higher number values produce rougher curves and  lower number values create smoother curves which require greater computation  The  number actually specifies the maximum error tolerance of a straight line segment  approximation of any portion of the curve     The printing system resets the flatness to 7 when it receives the RES command     File                      RES           N8 0  CMNT 300 dpi   UNIT Ce SPD 0 02    NEWP  CMNT 1st circle  FLAT 1    PMRA 7  16 5  2  0    PARC 7  16 5  2  0  360    STRK    NEWP  CMNT 2nd circle  FLAT 50    FLAT 50    PMRA 12  16 5  2  0    PARC 12  16 5  2  0  360    STRK    PAGE  EXIT                    Printout    104       FLST    FLST     print Font LiST    Format  FLST    Parameter  None   Function  The FLST command prints a list of all resident and downloaded  user defined  fonts in  the printing system  The list provides information on each font such as font name   whether it is scalable or bitmap  font selection sequence using FSET  font ID  etc  The  resident fonts are identified by the letter I  internal  in the font ID  the downloaded fonts  are identified by the letter M or D depending on whether the font is stored in the memory  card or the hard disk  respectively   The font list may differ depending on models    Related Commands  FSET  SENT  STAT   File          FLST  EXIT        105       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Sample of Font List                                               Font Name    scatabie Bitmap Pa
195. ng system is 1 dot  Minimum readable  width is probably higher  Minimum width meeting AIM recommendation for open  systems is 3 dots  After the first example has been printed  the printing system moves  cursor 1 inch down to print another example in which the minimum element width is  reverted to its default  3 dots      IR  RES    MZP 0  0    XBCP 1   02    XBAR Min  element width is  02 inches ENDB   MZP 0  1   XBCP 0   XBAR Min  element width is reset  to 3 dots  ENDB  EXIT                             Minimum element width is 0 02 inch  1    i           Default minimum element width  3 dots                 365       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 2     specify error correction level by    366    Format    percentage    XBCP 2  percentage     Parameter    percentage     Function    File    value between 0 and 400    PDF417 supports an error correction scheme  The XBCP 2 command specifies the error  correction level as a percentage of the number of code word values for the data to be  encoded  An illegal value defaults to 10     Note that XBCP 3  as explained on the next page  sets the error correction level by  predetermined values  and the execution of XBCP 3 disables the setting of XBCP 2  even  if XBCP 2 is executed after XBCP 3  until RES  reset  or XBCP 0     To set 5046 error correction level     IR  RES  XBCP 2  50   XBAR This is an error correction level test ENDB   EXIT                 XBCP 3    XBCP 3     set error correction level          Format  XBCP 3  le
196. nguiat  and ITC Bookman are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation  Revue is  a trademark of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation in the U S   Letraset Canada Ltd  in Canada  and Esselte Letraset Ltd  else   where     Monotype Imaging License Agreement    1     10     11     12     13     14      Software  shall mean the digitally encoded  machine readable  scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as  well as the UFST Software     You agree to accept a non exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights  styles and versions  of letters  numerals  characters and symbols   Typefaces   solely for your own customary business or personal pur   poses at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging  Under the terms of this License  Agreement  you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers  If you need to have access to the fonts on more  than three printers  you need to acquire a multi user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging   Monotype Imaging retains all rights  title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you  other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement     To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging  you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information  concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and 
197. nner and outer radii are nearly equal and the fill pattern is the all black pattern   PAT 1  for example   the result is a line arc  The line thickness is the difference between  the two radii  rather than the value designated by the SPD  set pen diameter  command     The ARC command does not draw the boundary of the filled in area        ARC             File  IR  RES  UNIT C   AP 5  8   PAT 52   ARC 1  2   45  45   AP 5  10   PTE  2   0  10   20  20   ARC 0  2  0  60   PAT 20   ARC 0  2  60  180   PAT 10   ARC 0  2  180  360   PAT 1   NEWP    PMZP 4  2   PARC 4  3  1  90  270   PARC 5  4  1  180  300   PARC 6  3  1  270  90   PARC 5  2  1  0  180   STRK   RP 0 6  1 1   SFNT  Univers Md            TEXT  ARC    PAGE  EXIT                    29          Related Command       ASFN    ASFN     ASsign external characters for FoNt    Format   ASFN mode  font number   Parameters  mode     A   assign external characters  R   release external characters    font number     Function    number identifying the external character font  1000 to 65535    The ASEN command assigns external characters which are defined by the user to the  current resident font  The external characters should be generated and downloaded in the  printing system as an external font by using the LDFC or LDEN command     For the print systems supporting 2 byte font system  if the user defined font is a 1 byte  code font  it is assigned to the current resident roman  ANK  font  If it is a 2 byte code  font  it is ass
198. nt PaLette                                                    Format  SCPL   Parameter  None  Function  The SCPL command saves the currently active palette  so that it can be retrieved later  using the RPPL  return to previous palette  command   Palettes can be saved as many as there is enough memory  If there is insufficient  memory  a memory overflow will result and the palette will not be saved   This command does not change the active palette  RPPL commands return to the saved  palettes in the reverse order in which they were saved   File        RES   SEM 6   UNIT C   SFNT  Incised901SWC Black   20   SPAL 100  CID 0  1  ACLI 1  128  64  64  SCPL   SPAL 101  CID 0  1  ACLI 1  128  0  128  SCPL   MZP 1  1  RPPL  SCOL 1   TEXT  This line is printed using palette 101     MZP 1  2  RPPL  SCOL 1   TEXT   This line is printed using palette 100     PAGE   EXIT   Printout    This line is printed using palette 101   This line is printed using palette 100     277       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SCRC     Set Command Recognition Character    Format    SCRC character     Parameter    character     new command recognition character  any character from ASCII code 33     to ASCII  code 126  7  except the apostrophe      quotation mark            semicolon         Function    The SCRC command changes the command recognition character between the  exclamation points in the PRESCRIBE start sequence     The change remains in effect until power is turned off or a RES  reset  command is  e
199. nt systems handling A3 ledger      0   100   Cassette size to cassette size    5   70     3 to A4  B4 to JIS B5  A4 to A5    6   8196  B4 to A4  B5 to   5    7   8696  A4 to JIS B5    8   94   A4 to letter    9   98   Cassette size to cassette size x 98                ren           1  2    Inoperable if ratio is specified   Not supported by some print systems    323       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    324    Function    Files    The SPSZ command sets the paper edge limits to the dimensions of a standard paper  size  allowing for a 5 mm border of all sides  The margins are set to the edge limits  This  command is particularly useful for printing on envelopes  size code 1 through 4  16  and  17   If size code is 0  the printing system adjusts the edge limits to match the cassette  size  size code defaults to 0 at power up and after a reset     Size codes 10 through 12  19  and 30 are supported only by the printing system model  that handles the A3 size paper  Support for other paper sizes and reduction ratios vary  depending on models  For details  see the user s manual supplied with the printing  system     If your printing system model supports the A3 size paper  the enlargement reduction  ratio parameter controls reduction and enlargement of printing a page sized by the size   code parameter  Although the enlargement reduction ratio parameter is optional  an  enlargement reduction ratio setting remains effective until an SPSZ command with new  enlargement reduction ratio sp
200. o 630   5   Epson LQ 850   6   HP LaserJet PCL   8   KC GL  Plotter    9   KPDL  an option on some models   Function    File    The SEM command temporarily changes the printing system s emulation mode  The new  mode remains in effect until another SEM or an RES  reset  command is issued     The SEM command also resets the margins and various other parameters  It should  therefore be placed at the beginning of a program or file     The SEM command does not change the power up emulation mode  When power is  switched off  the printing system loses the mode set by the SEM command  Upon power  up  it retains the default emulation  which is set by the P1 parameter of the FRPO  command     If you usually work in    emulation A  but occasionally use    emulation B   it is convenient  to set    emulation A    with the FRPO command and use the SEM command to change to     emulation B  when necessary  In this case you must avoid using the RES command in     emulation B   because the RES command resets the printing system to    emulation A              CMNT To work temporarily      the LQ 850 emulation   SEM 5   EXIT              SETF    SETF     SET alternate Font    Format                    alternate number  font number     Parameters    alternate number     a number from 0 to 31    font number     Function    File    a number from 0 to 65535    The SETF command assigns a font to an alternate number  so that it can be selected by  the ALTF  alternate font  command  The font number can
201. ocate the limit values for the storage capacities to store  temporary and permanent jobs  virtual mailbox jobs  and the number of Quick Copy jobs  in the hard disk    Files    To set the maximum capacity for the permanent jobs to 600 MB        IR  MPSS  CODE    PERMLIMITSIZE   600  EXIT                 To set the maximum capacity of the virtual mailbox to 800 MB                MPSS  VMB    VMBLIMITSIZE   800  EXIT           To set the maximum number of Quick Copy jobs  Job Retention  to 50                       MPSS    JOBR      QUICKLIMITCOUNT   50  EXIT        165       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    MRP     Move to Relative Position    166    Format           x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate y coordinate     coordinates as measured from the current cursor position    Function    The MRP command moves the cursor from its current position to a specified relative  position  measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  The coordinates may  be positive or negative     The MRP command works in the standard mode graphics only  To move to a relative  position in a path construction  use the PMRP  in Path  Move to Relative Position   command     File    IR  RES  UNIT C    SFNT  Helvetica Bd    CMNT MRP and baseball   RP 8  8  CIR  2    TEXT   15       RP OZ  7  CIR x25  TEXT   2nd       RP  2  2  CIR 22    TEXT   3rd       RP 2  2  CIR 22    TEXT   Home     PAGE   EXIT                                         Printout       2nd    Q 3rd O 1st    O 
202. ode set value appears as the U7 parameter  The factory setting is 0     Symbol Sets Available with INTL       Country code    Code set  emulation                                                            Epson   HP Laserjet  Dale vise  IBM Line Printer   OP  US ASCII  LQ US ISO 6 ASCII Diablo US IBM US  1  France  LQ France 15   25 France Diablo France  2  Germany  LQ Germany HP German Diablo Germany  3  UK  LQ UK  ISO 4 UK  Diablo UK   4 one LQ Denmark ISO 60 Norway Diablo Denmark IBM D N  way  5  Sweden  LQ Sweden ISO 11 Swedish Diablo Sweden  6  Italy  LQ Italy ISO 15 Italian Diablo Italy  7  Spain  LQ Spain HP Spanish Diablo Spain  8  Japan  LQ Japan ISO 14 JIS ASCII Diablo Japan  9  US Legal  LQ US Legal US Legal US Legal US Legal  10       PC 850  IBM PC 850 IBM PC 850 IBM PC 850  11         PC 860         PC 860 IBM PC 860 IBM PC 860  12         PC 863  IBM PC 863 IBM PC 863 IBM PC 863  13         PC 865  IBM PC 865 IBM PC 865 IBM PC 865  14  Norway  LQ Norway  15  Denmark 2  LQ Denmark 2  16  Spain 2  LQ Spain 2       17  Latin America     Latin America       a    The INTL command is primarily intended to access foreign characters not found in a current symbol    set   Default is US ASCII   It does not fully support all of the HP LaserJet symbol sets  To use one of  the HP symbol sets not listed above  see the CSET command page     Factory set  default  value       File    Printout    IR   CMNT  CMNT  RES   SFNT  EXIT           Diese        PAGE     This file will no
203. olor corresponding to the  number specified in the valid range  then the color black is specified     The following should be noted when specifying a color by its PANTONE name       Always enclose character strings in single quotation marks or double quotation  marks  Character strings may be entered in either upper case or lower case       nnames that contain a combination of words and numbers  such as Red 032 and  Cool Black 2  a space must be inserted between the words and number  If spaces are  not inserted  the words and numbers will be recognized as a different name  in which  case the color will not be specified correctly    e If a nonexistent name is specified  the command is ignored     When PANTONE is specified  a color space RGB palette is created  and a color  corresponding to the specified color number is assigned to the palette and selected  The  color is always assigned to index number 0     Colors may be added to the palette or changed  However  when a color is assigned to  index number 0  the colors created with the PANT command are discarded     The palette remains valid unless a new one is generated  Therefore  colors created with  the PANT command can be selected using SCOL 0      If the PANT command is issued multiple times  either in succession or not in  succession   the color which is valid is the color corresponding to the last entered  command  The colors corresponding to previously entered commands are deleted     The palette ID number remains valid
204. olute positions based on the margins  zero point positions based on the  printable area  or relative positions based on the current cursor position     Cursor movement commands only change the position of the cursor  Also  the cursor  may not be moved outside of the printable area  see MZP command   It is possible to  store the cursor position in memory then to return to that position stored in memory                          Command Function Page  MAP Move to Absolute Position 157  MRP Move to Relative Position 166  MRPA Move to Relative Position specified by Angle 168  MZP Move to Zero relative Position 173  RPP Return to Previous Position 229  SCP Save Current Position 274       Vector Graphics Commands    The commands below are used to create figures such as lines  circles  and rectangles  and  to add shading  simply by adding parameters     It is possible to specify colors for all vector graphics  For details  see a color specific  command such as SCOL        PRESCRIBE Command Reference    If an attempt is made to create figures outside of the printable area using these    commands  the coordinates are adjusted automatically so that the figures print inside the  printable area  As in the example below  this can produce printed results different from    what is expected     Print settings according to command       Actual printed result    Printing extremely complex figures can exhaust printing system memory  Downloadable  fonts can be particularly taxing on printing syst
205. ommand controls the palette identified by palette id in the way described by  the control mode  If palette id is not specified  the command is applied to palette of ID 0   No check is made whether the palette ID number given already exists for another palette   The palette ID number is reset to 0 by RES command     Mode A deletes all existing palettes and brings the default palette back to the default state   ID 0   Note that non active palettes are not deleted  Also  palette id is not used when  mode is A     Mode S deletes all palettes that are not active  The active palette is not affected  Also   any ID specified by palette id is not used     Mode D deletes the palette having the ID specified by palette id regardless of being  active or inactive  If the palette deleted was active  then the current palette will be a  monochrome palette having the same ID as that of the deleted palette     Mode C copies the currently active palette to a new palette with the new ID specified by  palette id  If the palette having the same ID already exists  that palette is overwritten     Deleting or copying a color palette does not affect color print quality on output pages     63       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CPTH     Character PaTH    64                Format  CPTH    string      Parameter  string   any character string except from ASCII code 31  hex 1F  and lower  Function  The CPTH command constructs a path which adds the outlines of characters to the  current path  When stroked o
206. one  However  a toggle  switch is provided since  as mentioned earlier  this process cannot be determined  objectively     This command is irrelevant to models FS 8000C and KM C830        GRRD    GRRD     GRaphic data ReaD       Format   GRRD format  width  height    image    ENDG   Parameters  format     width     height     image     Function    File    image format     B   Bitmap  J   JPEG  T   TIFF    number from 0 to 65535    number from 0 to 65535    file name based on a specified format    The GRRD command allows the image data of a specified format to be drawn in a  specified size at a specified location  This command is terminated with the ENDG  command     The color space for each format is compatible only with RGB  In the case of TIFF  format  the command is compatible with non compression  LZW  and PackBit  Upon  receipt of incompatible format and or color space data  this command is ignored     Width and height specifications are dependent on the current unit of measurement   UNIT   If the output image has a specified width of 0  the image will be printed in a  width varying with the height of the output image  while retaining the vertical horizontal  ratio of the original image data as it is  If the output image has a specified height of 0  the  image will be printed in a height varying with the width of the output image  while  retaining the vertical horizontal ratio of the original image data as it is  When the output  image has both a specified width and heig
207. or mode and    to receive the pages in the sorter s bulk tray  if available      This command is irrelevant to certain combination of photocopier models and option fin        isher models   IR  RES   EXIT    Page 1  2  Page 2  2  Page 3  2  Page 4  2       G  TK 1     copies   copies   copies   copies     2  COPY 2   tray 1   R   tray 2   R   tray 1   R   tray 2   R     PAGE  EXI  PAGE  EXI  PAGE  EXIT   PAGE  EXIT                                         CTXT    CTXT     print Centered TeXT    Format   CTXT   string     option     U option     Parameters  string    any character string  option    B   Leave cursor at center of string   E   Move cursor at end of string   L   Move cursor down one line   N   Move cursor to beginning of next line  U option    Underline text  Function    File    The CTXT command prints the given string centered at the cursor location  then moves  the cursor as designated by the option  The string must be enclosed in either single or  double quotation marks   If the string includes one kind of quotation marks  use the other  kind to enclose it   If the string is omitted  nothing is printed  If the option is omitted  the  cursor is not moved  If the U option is specified  the text is underlined  The underline  thickness and location can be set by the SULP command     The string is not centered between the right and left margins unless the cursor is located  halfway between the margins  Before the CTXT command  the cursor should be moved  to the desir
208. or position  The line thickness used is designated by the SPD command   A circle can also be drawn by using the path mode graphics  Refer to the PARC  command    File          RES  UNIT C  SLS  5   SPD  01  MAP 10  1        CIR  1  MRP        1           2              2   CIR  4  MRP 0   4   CIR  8  MRP 0   8   SPD  02    CIR 1 6  MRP 0  1 6   CIR 3 2  MRP 0  3 2     SPD  2    CIR  1  MRP  2   4    SFNT  Helvetica Nr   TEXT  Cursor now here      PAGE   EXIT                    52       CIR    Printout    Cursor now here    53       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CLIP     CLIP current path    Format    CLIP  clip mode       Parameter    clip mode     1  EO clip  2  Non zero winding clip    Function    The CLIP command sets the current path as the clipped path  After this command is  issued  no painting is done outside the area of the path  Executing this command does not  delete the current path     The RES command initializes paths to a state with no clip area     54       CLPR    CLPR     CLiP Rectangular area    Format  CLPR  xl  yl  x2  y2    Parameters  xl   x coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle  yl   y coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle  x2   x coordinate of the bottom right corner of the rectangle  y2   y coordinate of the bottom right corner of the rectangle  Function    The CLPR command describes a rectangular path which intersects the inside of the texts   current path  or raster graphics objects  The clipping rectangle does not clip th
209. ord  358  printing alistof  134  printing using command  136    W  Wide A4  360    Index 5    KYOCERA MITA AMERICA  INC     Headquarters    225 Sand Road    Fairfield  New Jersey 07004 0008  TEL    973  808 8444   FAX    973  882 6000    New York Branch    1410 Broadway 23rd floor  New York  NY 10018   TEL    917  286 5400   FAX    917  286 5402    Northeastern Region    225 Sand Road    Fairfield  New Jersey 07004 0008  TEL    973  808 8444   FAX    973  882 4401    Midwestern Region    201 Hansen Court Suite 119  Wood Dale  Illinois 60191  TEL    630  238 9982   FAX    630  238 9487    Western Region    14101 Alton Parkway    Irvine  California 92618 7006  TEL    949  457 9000   FAX    949  457 9119    KYOCERA MITA CANADA  LTD     6120 Kestrel Road  Mississauga   Ontario L5T 1S8  Canada   TEL    905  670 4425   FAX    905  670 8116    KYOCERA MITA MEXICO  S A  DE C V     Av  16 de Septiembre  407  Col  Santa In  s   Azcapotzalco M  xico    D F  02130  M  xico   TEL    55  5383 2741   FAX    55  5383 7804    Southeastern Region   1500 Oakbrook Drive   Norcross  Georgia 30093  TEL    770  729 9786  FAX    770  729 9873    Southwestern Region   2825 West Story Road   Irving  Texas 75038 5299  TEL    972  550 8987  FAX    972  252 9786    National Operation Center   amp  National Training Center   2825 West Story Road   Irving  Texas 75038 5299  TEL    972  659 0055   FAX    972  570 5816    Latin America Division    8240 N W  52nd  Terrace Dawson Building   Suite 108 Miami  Fl
210. orida 33166   TEL    305  421 6640   FAX    305  421 6666    KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V     Hoeksteen 40  2132 MS Hoofddorp    The Netherlands   Phone   31 20 654 0000   Home page  http   www kyoceramita europe com  Email  infoGkyoceramita europe com    KYOCERA MITA NEDERLAND B V   Beechavenue 25 1119RA Schiphol Rijk  The Netherlands   Phone   31 20 58 77 200    KYOCERA MITA  UK  LTD   8 Beacontree Plaza   Gillette Way Reading Berks RG2 OBS   U K    Phone   44 1189 311  500    KYOCERA MITA ITALIA S p A    Via G  Verdi  89   91  20063 Cernusco s N  Milano  Italy   Phone   39 02 92179 1    S A  KYOCERA MITA BELGIUM N V   Sint Martinusweg 199 201  1930 Zaventem   Belgium   Phone   32 2 720 9270   KYOCERA MITA FRANCE S A    Parc Les Algorithmes Saint Aubin   91194 GIF SUR YVETTE    France   Phone   33 1 6985 2600    KYOCERA MITA ESPANA S A    Edificio Kyocera  Avda de Manacor No  2   28290 Las Matas  Madrid     Spain   Phone   34 91 631 8392   KYOCERA MITA FINLAND OY  Kirvesmiehenkatu 4  00880 Helsinki   Finland   Phone   358 9 4780 5200   KYOCERA MITA  SCHWEIZ   Hohlstrasse 614  8048 Z  rich  Switzerland   Phone   41 1 908 4949   KYOCERA MITA DEUTSCHLAND GMBH  Otto Hahn Str  12 D 40670 Meerbusch   Germany   Phone   49 2159 918 0   KYOCERA MITA GMBH AUSTRIA  Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95    1230 Wien    Austria   Phone   43 1 86338 210   KYOCERA MITA SVENSKA AB  Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista    Sweden   Phone   46 8 546 55000      2007 KYOCERA MITA Corporation  tl KYOCERd is a trademark
211. ose  graphics segments drawn in the standard mode graphics  Any painting operations outside  the specified rectangle is erased and those segments within it are painted on the page      x1  y1        1          Clipping rectangle     lt      Area to be printed               x2  y2     The coordinates are measured from the top and left edge limits in the units designated by  the UNIT command  If the parameters are omitted  the rectangle is equal to the size of  the current page size  If an attempt is made to position the top left corner to the right of  the bottom left corner  greater values for    1  y   than for  x2  y2    the printing system  exchanges the coordinate values with each other     The printing system resets the size of the rectangular clipping path to be equal to the  maximum printable area of the current page size when a PSRC  RES  SPO  or SPSZ  Set  Page SiZe  command is encountered     55       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File          RES  UNIT C   NEWP    SPD 1    PMRA 6  9  3  0    PAT 1    PARC 6  9  3  0  360   CLER  37 26  9   12   STRE    PAGE    EXIT                 Printout       56       CLSP    CLSP     CLoSe Path       Format  CLSP   Parameter  None  Function  The CLSP command closes an open path by adding a line segment extending from the  end of the path to the beginning of the path   Simply ending a path at the path s starting point does not make it a closed path  such a  path remains open until it is closed  Closure can be made either expli
212. out    1  FAREWELL TO    ITALICS    2  FAREWELL TO ITALICS    75       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    DELM     DELete Macro    Format       DELM macro name      Parameter                          name defined by a previous MCRO command  Function  The DELM command deletes a specified macro definition from the printing system s    memory to make room for new macros  fonts  or graphics  or so that the same name can  be used for another macro     76       File    Printout                                                                                     UIRISOUNII        CRO BX    SPD  05  BOX  8    8  MRP 1  O0   ENDM    CRO SCREEN    width  depth    CMNT Draws box with rounded corners   CMNT Leaves cursor at previous position   SPD  08    SCP          25   25  ARC  223   90  270  0   RP 0    25  DRP  1  0    RP 10  425         23  30 0  90          27  0         0    2    RP   27  0  ARC  23   30  90  180   RPP    RP 0   25         0   2    RP  25  0  ARC  23   30  180  270   RP 0   27  DRP  1  0    RPP   ENDM   SFNT  Helvetica Bd     AP 5  4   CALL SCREEN  9 2  1 7    AP 7  5    EXT  This text is enclosed by   L   Text  SCREEN macro       DELM SCREEN    AP 5 8   CALL SCREEN  9 2  1 7    AP 6  10    TEXT  SCREEN macro was deleted by DELM       PAGE   EXIT                          This text is enclosed by    SCREEN macro     SCREEN macro was deleted by DELM     DELM    77       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    DPAT     select Dashed PATtern    78    Format  DPAT number    Paramet
213. ow  opaque  The pattern s white pixels overlay the destination image in the shape of the letter  A     operation mode   5  The source image is opaque and the pattern image is transparent   Being opaque  the source image  the letter A  as it is enclosed within a square comes  overlaid onto the destination  The pattern image fills only the area on the destination  which is covered by white pixels  Note that the letter A is patterned only with its  opposing quarters     operation mode   6  Both source and pattern images are opaque  the entire letter A is  patterned  and the full source image is overlaid onto the destination     Operation Modes    Operation mode 3 Operation mode  7                   N 4     Operation mode  5 Operation mode 6       299       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File    IR  RI  NEWP   PMZP 5   PDRP 2   PAT 1    FILL 1   RP  1              ES     UNIT C     5   55 205 105  SIMG 4     2 55    3 5  PAT 18        FSE  FILL       1        T 4158    3BOS1P108V                 PAGE     EXIT        Printout    300       d     T       EXT  A            SIMP    SIMP     create SIMPIe color palette    Format    SIMP palette     Parameter    palette     1   single plane K  Black  palette  Default   3   3 plane device RGB palette    Function    The SIMP command creates a palette already defined by the system from either a single  plane  monochrome  or 3 plane  8 color  RGB palette  The default palette is a  monochrome palette     Colors and parameters specifiable by 
214. p tray with the pages in reverse  order  page 3 on top     IR  PAGE  EXIT                       pd                      Fl                   STAT    STAT     STATus    Format  STAT  mode    Parameter  mode   0   prints a user status page  default   1   prints a service person status page  Function    The STAT command instructs the printing system to print a page of status information   starting on a new page  The status page lists the software version and release date as well  as the following information       The current unit  inches  centimeters  points  or dots  not available in KPDL mode      The current page orientation  font  and country code  not available in KPDL mode      Current margins  line spacing  character spacing  and graphics line width  as  measured in the current unit  not available in KPDL mode      Current memory allocations    The above status settings are temporary conditions set by PRESCRIBE commands  They  revert to their default values when power is switched off  Other status page information  includes       Miscellaneous status  a list of options stored in permanent memory  See Chapter 6 of  the Technical Reference manual for the definitions of the option values  These values  do not change when power is switched off  Only the FRPO command can alter them    e Service information to inform a service person    e Nonresident fonts in memory  Fonts generated by the LDFC command   downloadable soft fonts from software or read from a memory card  Font si
215. ple     Write and register printable data  TEST  to the hard disk                                IR  RWRF W  0   PRN    TEST    R  TEXT  TEST   PAGE  EXIT   WRED  EXIT                 261       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SATU     adjust SATUration level    262    Format    SATU degree     Parameter    degree     Function    degree of saturation level     number from    10 to 10  Default   0     The SATU command adjusts saturation level based on the specified parameter     The color bars below show saturation variations using hue          as an example  The top  color bar represents the default saturation variation  The A symbol indicates the median     The left side represents the lower saturation range and the right side the higher saturation  range  The middle color bar is an example showing an increase in saturation   The higher  saturation range is increased   The middle color bar is an example showing a decrease in  saturation   The lower saturation range is increased         Default saturation  balance       Saturation  increased    Saturation  decreased             Varying saturation allows images in the lower saturation range to be more saturated and  sharp or  conversely  images in the higher saturation range to be faint and shaded off     Saturation cannot be controlled hue by hue  However  since impressions vary with hue   you need to control with care     This command is enabled for all color spaces  all color modes and all monitor simulation  modes     If ink
216. ply Tray ATtributes          TEXT     print TEXT  TPRS     Text PaRSing       256  257  258  260  261  262  263  265  267  269  271  273  274  275  277  278  280  281  282  284  286  287  289  293  296  297  298  301  303  304  306  308  309  311  312  314  316  317  319  321  323  325  327  329  331  333  334  335  337  339  340  342  343  345  347  348  350    Index    TRSM     TRansparency Separate Mode    351       UNIT     set UNIT of measurement    352          UOM     Unit Of Measurement per dots  VMAL     Virtual Mailbox ALias    354  356          VMOB     Virtual Mailbox Output Bin  VMPW     set Virtual Mailbox PassWord    357  358       WIDE     set WIDE A4 mode    360       WRED     WRite EnD    361       362       XBAR     print two dimensional barcode       XBCP 0     select barcode type reset all other XBCP parameters  XBCP 1     specify narrowest element width    364  365          XBCP 2     specify error correction level by percentage  XBCP 3     set error correction level    366  367       XBCP 4     set data code word rows    368       XBCP 5     set data code word columns    369       XBCP 6     determine aspect ratio of vertical height and horizontal width    370       XBCP 7     determine bar height  XBCP 8     automatically set rows and columns    372  373          XBCP 9     enable truncation  XBCP 10     enable file name    374  375       XBCP 11     enable block count    376       XBCP 12     enable time stamp    3T        XBCP 13     enable sender ID
217. position  x2  y2    coordinates of the second control point as measured from the current cursor position  x3  y3    coordinates of the end point as measured from the current cursor position  Function    The PCRP command adds a B  zier curve segment to the path  starting from the current  cursor point  referred to as current position as shown at right  through two control points  of  x1  y1  and  x2  y2   and ending at  x3            Example     NEWP   PMZP 5  10    PCRP 2 5   4       5  7        STRK           7  5         25  4        Current position  7 0     185       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    File                Printout    Current positon       5  1 5     e  4 2   6  1 8     File     IR  RES  UNIT C    NEWP    SPD  1    PMZP 3  3    PORE  5 5  Lady Bp 5 5  7 77   STRE    PAGE    EXIT                 Printout    Current positon       186       PCZP    PCZP     in Path  Curve to Zero relative Position    Format  PCZP xl  yl  x2  y2  x3  y3   Parameters  xl  yl   coordinates of the first control point as measured from the left and top edge limits of  paper  x2  y2   coordinates of second control point as measured from the left and top edge limits of  paper  x3  y3   coordinates of end point as measured from the left and top edge limits of paper  Function    The PCZP command adds a B  zier curve segment to the path  starting from the current  cursor position through two controls points of  x1  y1  and  x2  y2   and ending at  x3   y3   measured from the left and top edg
218. r   font number  integer from 1000 to 65535     code    ASCII code of the character code  0 to 255 for European  0 to 65533 for Japanese  or in   hexadecimal notation   xxxx   height    height of the character bitmap  in dots  integer from 1 to 65535   width    width of the character bitmap  in dots  integer from 1 to 65535   y offset    bitmap Y offset  in 1 32 dots  integer from  32768 to 32767   x offset    bitmap X offset  in 1 32 dots  integer from  32768 to 32767   cell width    character width  in 1 32 dots  integer from 1 to 65535   bit map     bitmap transfer data  BBN format     149       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    150    Function    The LDEN C command defines bitmap characters for each character code for the  downloaded font header already defined using LDEN F  Note that each character code  defined must match the font number  symbol set  1  or 2 byte code   and other  information of the font header already created  The bitmap data transferred at the end of  this command is transferred under Kyocera s original BBN format  This is the transfer  format used by the LDFC and LDKC commands     This command is recommended for use with downloading bitmap fonts  In other words   this command is intended as an equivalent for the old LDFC and LDKC commands  Use  this command when creating a new bitmap font  LDFC  LDKC and CRKF will be  deleted in the future     Units used in height  width  y offset  x offset and cell width are dots of the resolution  defined in the font 
219. r  symbols of a particular written language  country  or software application  Charts of the  available symbol sets are displayed in Emulation of the Technical Reference manual   emulation by emulation     Depending on the current emulation  the printer selects one of the symbol sets of the  emulated printer appropriate for the country as requested by the country code value  For  example  when the printer is set in the default emulation mode 6  HP LaserJet   country  code 0  US ASCII  selects the ISO 6 ASCII symbol set of the HP LaserJet printer  If the  current emulation mode is 1  IBM   country code 0 selects the IBM US symbol set of the  IBM Proprinter     Differences in symbol sets can be seen in the upper half of the character code table   consisting of character codes 128 through 254  hex 80 through FE   The availability of  the symbol sets to the country code values appear in the table below     129       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    130    For example  the character assigned to character code 93  hex 5D  varies according to  the country code as follows     US  France  Germany  Denmark  Italy  Spain    oO Do Cho        The code set parameter adjusts for the different symbol sets  According to the code set  parameter specified  the printer selects a symbol set available to the current emulation     The default country code value appears as the U6 parameter and can be set using an  FRPO command  The factory setting is 0  the standard US ASCII symbol set  The  default c
220. r an A4 cassette      SPSZ 8    PAT 16  300    UNIT C    MZP 4  24  BOX 6   6    MZP 7  24  BOX 3   3  BLK 3   3   MZP 4  24    TEXT  L    TEXT  Portrait orientation       SPO L    ZP 12  10  BOX 6   6    ZE 154 10  BOX 3   3  BLK 3   3   ZB l2   VOF   TEXT  L    TEXT  Landscape orientation                                       U  D  n                        Printout    Landscape orientation    Portrait orientation    322       SPSZ    SPSZ     Set Paper SiZe    Format    SPSZ size code   ratio      Parameters    size code   0   Same as the size of the paper cassette  1   Monarch  3 7 8 x 7 1 2 inches    2   Business  4 1 8 x 9 1 2 inches    3   International DL  11 x 22 cm    4   International C5  16 2 x 22 9 cm    5   Executive  7 1 4 x 10 1 2 inches    6   US Letter  8 1 2 x 11 inches   7   US Legal  8 1 2 x 14 inches   8   A4  21 0 x 29 7 cm   9   JIS B5  18 2 x 25 7 cm   10   A3  29 7 x 42 cm   11   B4  25 7 x 36 4 cm   12   US Ledger  11 x 17 inches   13   AS  14 8 x 21 cm   14         10 5 x 14 8 cm    15   JIS       12 8 x 18 2 cm   16   Commercial  9  3 7 8 x 8 7 8 inches    17   Commercial  6  3 5 8 x 6 1 2 inches    18   ISO B5  17 6 x 25 cm   19   Custom  11 7 x 17 7 inches    30   C4  22 9 x 32 4            31   Hagaki  10 x 14 8           32   Ofuku Hagaki  14 8 x 20         33   Officio II  36        Wide t  37   Ledger Wide      39 8    40   16K  50   Statement      51   Folio     52   Youkei 211  53   Youkei 411    ratio   Enlargement reduction ratio  for pri
221. r filled  it prints the given string at the current cursor  position and moves the cursor to the end of the string  The current font preceding this  command must be a resident or a soft scalable font   The character path can be filled in with the pattern or shade of gray designated by the  previous PAT  FPAT  or GPAT command   File        FSET 1p72v1s0b4148T  CMNT Univers MdIt   NEWP   PMZP 2  2   CPTH  Enjoy    STRK   PAGE   EXIT   Printout    ENJOY       CSET     Change symbol SET by symbol set ID    Format    CSET symbol set id         Parameter    symbol set id     symbol set ID    0     ISO 60 Norway  OE   Roman Extension  OF   ISO 25 French   0G   HP German   OI 2 ISO 15 Italian          ISO 14 JIS ASCII  ON   ECMA 94 Latin 1  OS   ISO 11 Swedish  00   ISO 6 ASCII   1D   ISO 61 Norwegian  1E ISO4 U K    1F   ISO 69 France          ISO 21 Germany  1S   ISO 15 Spanish   1U   US Legal   2K   ISO 57 Chinese  2N   ISO Latin 2   2S   ISO 17 Spain   2U   ISO 2 IRV   3R   PC Cyrillic    3S   ISO 10 Swedish  4S   ISO 16 Portuguese  4U   Roman 9   5M   PS Math   5N   ISO Latin 5   5S   ISO 84 Portuguese  ST   ISO Windows Latin 5  6J   MS Publishing   6M   Ventura Math   6N   ISO8859 10 Latin 6  6S   ISO 85 Spanish   7J   Desktop   8G   Greek 8   8M   Math 8   8Q   PC Set 1 IBM   8T   Turkish 8   8U   Roman 8   9E   Windows Latin 2  9G   Windows 3 1 Latin Greek  9J   PC 1004   OL   Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats  ON   ISO Latin 9   9Q   PC Extension    CSET    65       PRESCRIBE Comman
222. ransparent  6 Opaque Opaque    The SIMG command sets the mode for controlling the transparency and opaqueness of  an image and the current pattern when they are overlaid on each other     In the table above  the source image can be a rectangular area  characters  or a raster  graphics image preceded by an SIMG command  The fill patterns and gray shade  rendered with the PAT  pattern   FPAT  fill pattern   and GPAT  gray pattern  commands  can be used for pattern images     With operation modes 1 and 2  the SIMG command takes care of the source image   s  transparency only  The default operation mode is 1  The white pixels of the source image  do not overlay on the destination  For example  you cannot pattern a character  With  operation mode 2  the SIMG command applies the white pixels of the source image onto  the destination directly     SIMG 1 SIMG 2                                                                            SIMG    The figure on the next page illustrates the effects of operation mode 3 through 6  In this  example  the letter A represents the source image overlaid with the pattern image  while  the two rectangles are referred to as the destination image     operation mode   3  Both the source image and pattern image are transparent  Since the  source image is transparent  in the first example  the letter A is patterned and overlaid  onto the destination image  two rectangles      operation mode   4  The source image is transparent and the pattern image is n
223. ration mode   A barcode is output on the first page only  The barcode  position is    0         IR    STAK 3  CMNT Face down    JOG    JOBS 0 3 0 0 0  My Trial    Halle Berry    01 12 02    TEXT  Page One  Testing how JOG works      PAGE   TEXT  Page Two  Testing how JOG works     PAGE   TEXT  Page Three  Testing how JOG works     PAGE    JOBT    EXIT                                   145       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    LAPI     LoaD API Program    146    Format    LAPI Program type  PRESCRIBE command  function name     Parameters    Program type     Type of the downloading program   PRE  PRESCRIBE command    PRESCRIBE command name     Name of the PRESCRIBE command to be stored  Alphanumeric string of 2 to 4 characters   Only in the case of  PRE      Function name     Function    Name of the function that starts the user program   Only in the case of  PRE    Up to 31 characters    The LAPI command downloads the API program    As described in the example below  add the string  WRED  to the end of the  downloading data as a terminator    It is possible to add a string other than  WRED   It is because if the downloading  program includes the string  WRED   this must be changed  To change the terminator   use the RWRF T command    When storing anew PRESCRIBE command  if the specified command name has already  been stored  the sending data will be invalid    Data downloaded with the LAPI command will be deleted  invalid  upon the system  restart     Example           LAPI  PR
224. s  upon their return to Monotype Imaging     IN NO EVENT WILL MONOTYPE IMAGING BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS  LOST DATA  OR ANY OTHER INCI   DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ABUSE OR MISAPPLICATION OF  THE SOFTWARE AND TYPEFACES     Massachusetts U S A  law governs this Agreement     You shall not sublicense  sell  lease  or otherwise transfer the Software and or Typefaces without the prior written con   sent of Monotype Imaging     Use  duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data  and Computer Software clause at FAR 252 227 7013  subdivision  b  3  ii  or subparagraph  c  1  ii   as appropriate   Further use  duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR  52 227 19  c  2      YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT  UNDERSTAND IT  AND AGREE TO BE  BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS  NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REP   RESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT  NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE  UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY  BY OPEN   ING THIS DISKETTE PACKAGE  YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREE   MENT     This page is left blank intentionally    Table of Contents                                                                                                                                           Overview
225. s in permanent memory  Refer to the FRPO INIT command page         Value after reset                                                 Related PRE   Parameter  Related FRPO parameter  SCRIBE Com   LaserJet  PCL  IBM Epson Diablo mands  Command recogni  R  P9   lt      SCRC  tion character  Emulation mode 6  P1                   Unit of measure  Inches  lt   lt  UNIT  ment  Number of copies 1   lt   lt            per page  Cassette Cassette 1  main cassette   R4       PSRC  Paper tray Face down  RO   lt   lt  STAK  Paper size Cassette size  R2    lt      SPSZ  Top margin 1 2 inch  150 dots  0  A1 2   lt  STM  Left margin Left logical 0  A3 4   lt  SLM  Right margin Right logical Max  size    5 6   lt  SRM  SPW  Bottom margin 1 2 inch  150 dots  Max  size  A7 8   lt  SBM  SPL   SLPP  Page orientation Portrait  Orienta    Portrait  Orienta    Portrait  C1   SPO  tion of font C5 2 3  tion of font C5 2 3   Line spacing           00 1   lt   lt  SLS  SLPI  Character spacing 10 cpi  Spacing of 10 cpi  02 3   lt  SCS  SCPI  font C5 2 3        219       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    220       Value after reset                   Related PRE   Parameter  Related FRPO parameter  SCRIBE Com   LaserJet  PCL  IBM Epson Diablo mands  Underline thickness 4 dots  7 dots  lt   lt  SULP  and distance below  baseline  Current font Font 1  C5 2 3  or Font 8  IBM  Font 1  C5 2 3  FONT  FSET         scalable font   Font 1  Epson  or V3  scalable SENT  font    Alternate font None See Emulation of  lt 
226. s no password is set for the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox    new password     1 to 65535   New password for the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox  0   Indicates no password is to be set for the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox    Function  The VMPW command sets the output password for a virtual mailbox     If this command is used on a virtual mailbox for which a password is already set  that  password must be specified by current password or the command will be invalid and an  error will be displayed on the operator panel  An error also will results if the password  specification fails or no virtual mailbox corresponds to the alias given  For error  displays  see the Technical Reference manual     The master password is valid as the current password for all virtual mailboxes     Virtual mailboxes for which a password has been set are not shown on the VMB LIST  page  See page 134      2  This command is irrelevant to photocopy virtual mailbox function        VMPW    Files    To set 9999 as the password for virtual mailbox number 3 for  which no password is set   IR  VMPW 3  0  9999  EXIT     To set no password for the virtual mailbox with the alias  MyMailbox for which the password 9999 had been set                    VMPW  MyMailbox   9999  0  EXIT     To change the password for the virtual mailbox with the alias Purchase Dept  from 9999  to 3333              VMPW  Purchase Dept    9999  3333  EXIT     359       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    WIDE     set WIDE 
227. s now in ratio of 2 3    See XBCP 6             The bar height is twice as high as the element width        Original  default  barcode       XBCP 8    XBCP 8     automatically set rows and columns    Format    XBCP 8     Parameter    Function    None    The XBCP 8 command permits the system to automatically set rows and columns so that  it satisfies the requirement that the multiplication of rows times columns is less than or  equal to 928  Default is disabled     Note that the XBCP 8 overrides XBCP 4 and or 5 which set the number of rows and    columns  However  this command is not effective if both XBCP 6 and XBCP 4 and or 5  are issued together  Precedence of XBCP modes is  4 5  8  4 54 8  6     373       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 9     enable truncation    Format    XBCP 9     Parameter    None    Function    The XBCP 9 command can generate a truncated PDF417 symbol that omits the right row  indicator and the stop pattern  Default is non truncation     374       XBCP 10    XBCP 10     enable file name    Format   XBCP 10   file name     Parameter  file name    string containing a file name  Function    File    A Macro PDF417 symbol contains an optional file name field  The XBCP 10 command  enables this field and defines its contents     The string must be surrounded by single or double quote marks  be less than 200  characters long and only contain EXC mode compaction characters  20H 7FH   This  command is ignored if the string does not satisfy these conditions 
228. sk capacity  font cache capacity and data type are listed  with login file names for file  data output in separate columns     A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used        RWER R    RWER R      Read Write External Resource  Read  data from external media    Format       RWER     medium  data type    partition name       Parameters    medium     0   hard disk or RAM disk       memory card       EPROM    data type   2   Printable data  128   API data  downloadable program     partition name   Name of partition from which data is read  a maximum of 15 printable ASCII characters    Function    The RWER R command reads data from any external media whether it is a memory card   hard disk  EPROM  or RAM disk     Only data types 2 and 128 are allowed  Note that reading data of other data types  such as  fonts and macros  does not require this command since the printing system automatically  reads them at power up     If the same partition name exists on different external media  the priority with which data  is read is as follows     High  gt  Low  Card Hard disk  RAM disk  EPROM    The partition name may be a maximum of 15 printable ASCII characters  20H through           upper and lowercase letters are regarded as distinct  A partition name may not  have leading spaces  and in the command  the partition name must be enclosed in single  or double quotation marks     This command causes a page break   Reading data from a me
229. ssword     Selection  FSET                                                                                           LLLE              gun                                                                                                        onal                                                                                                                                                                                    CLLLELLL LCI                                                                                   onal                                                                                                          LLLLE LI  anal  CLLLLLLLLLE                                                                                                     onan PT        CLLLI                                                   CLLLELELLLELE D                                                                                                 CLLLELLLELEL                                  106       FOLD    FOLD     FOLD printed pages    Format   FOLD  staple     Parameter  staple        stapling  Function    File    The FOLD command is effective only when the optional document finisher having the  booklet stitcher is installed to the printing system  This command is most conveniently  used with the BKLT command that allows printing a job as a booklet  reordering and  printing the pages    two up    on a sheet of paper     The FOLD command outputs printed pages stapling and binding them toget
230. staple every 5 sheets of a job at the center 2 staples  printing 15 copies of the job              IR  STPL 3  5       5    JOBS 2  15  1  0  1   Interim Report 1    Steve    09 22 02  19 24     TEXT  This is Interim Report 1       PAGE    UNIT C  BOX 5 10  PAGE    JOBT  EXIT           1    This value depends on the stapler to be used     339       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    STPL     STaPLe    340    Format    STPL  position       Parameter    position     Function    stapling position     1   bottom left  one staple   2     top left  one staple   3   left  two staples  straight for Legal size   50   top left  one staple   51   top right  one staple   52   left  two staples   53   right  two staples   54   top  two staples    Staple parameters and positions    2  Legal 3    1 2        7            50 51 52 53                 A      The STPL command staples the pages of a job at the position specified by the position  parameter  See above   using a document finisher incorporating the stapler unit  With  position 2  top left   stapling is automatically straightened  vertical  when Legal size  paper is used      gt        Parameter values 50 to 54 are valid for certain copier models only     The number of sheets that the stapler can staple at a time depends on the STPC command  setting     The job to be stapled must be defined by the JOBS command  Stapling is valid only  when the STPL command is issued preceding a JOBS command sequence    The STPL command automatically deact
231. sults in unnatural spacing of proportional fonts     SCS 0 does not change the width of the space character     The character spacing can be set using either the SCS or the SCPI command     File             RES  SLM 1  STM 2  EXIT    This line has the default spacing   IR  UNIT C  SCS  3  EXIT   This line has a slightly wider spacing    IR  SENT  TimesNewRoman    10  SCS  2  EXIT    his is a proportional font printed with fixed spacing   R  SCS 0  EXIT    his is correct proportional spacing    IR  PAGE  EXIT                                 H          H             Printout    This line has the default spacing   This line has a slightly wider spacing   This is a proportional font printed with fixed spacing     This is correct proportional spacing        SCSZ    SCSZ     Set Custom paper SiZe    Format    SCSZ width  height  unit   Parameters    width     width of custom paper size    height    height of custom paper size  unit    M   millimeters       inches  Function    The SCSZ command sets the paper size when the user defined size paper is used in the  universal cassette  This command defines the width and height values for the custom  paper size which is summoned by the SPSZ  set page size  19  command    The SCSZ command causes a page break  so it should be placed at the top of a file or  program  or at the beginning of a new page  This command uses the unit set in the unit  parameter of this command  regardless of the unit set in the UNIT command  The setting  made with 
232. t bitmap Font Attributes    Format  SFA hmi  vmi  F P   rotation  symbol set  height  U I  weight  type   face     font type     Executable Parameters  hmi   horizontal motion index  in a fixed font  the distance from the center of one character to  the center of the next  in a proportionally spaced font  the width of the space character  vmi   vertical motion index   the line to line spacing  F P          fixed spacing  P   proportional spacing    Non executable Parameters    rotation    0   normal   1   face down   2   upside down   3   face up  used in landscape mode   symbol set     symbol set  number from 0 to 65535    4   ISO 60 Norway   5   Roman Extension  9   ISO 15 Italian   14  ECMA 94 Latin 1  19   ISO 11 Swedish  21 2 ISO 6 ASCII   37   15040        38   ISO 69 France   39   ISO 21 Germany  53   US Legal   75  ISO   83   ISO 17 Spain   277   HP Roman 8  305   PC Extension  341   IBM PC 8   373   IBM PC 8  D N   405   IBM PC 850    289       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    290    height     UA     weight     type face     font type     Function    maximum height of the font    U   upright  I   italic    degree of bolding  from  7  light  to  7  bold     0   Line Printer  1   Pica 2   Elite    3   Courier   4   Swiss 721  5   Dutch 801  6   Gothic   7   Script   8   Pret  Elite  9   Caslon   10   Orator    0   7 bit  96 characters  character codes 32 to 127    1   8 bit  192 characters  character codes 32 to 127 and 160 to 255    2   8 bit  256 characters  All chara
233. t new PAGE 178  PANT     create PANTone color palette 179  PARC     in Path  draw ARC 181  PAT     select fill PATtern 183  PCRP     in Path  Curve to Relative Position 185  PCZP     in Path  Curve to Zero relative Position 187  PDIR     set Print DIRection 189  PDRP     in Path  Draw to Relative Position 192  PDZP     in Path  Draw to Zero relative Position 194  PELP     in Path  draw ELlipse 196  PIE     draw PIE chart 198  PMRA     in Path  Move to Relative position specified by Angle 200  PMRP     in Path  Move to Relative Position 202  PMZP     in Path  Move to Zero relative Position 204  PNCH     PuNCH 206  PRBX     in Path  draw Round BoX 208  PRRC     in Path  at Relative position  draw aRC 210  PSRC     select Paper SouRCe 212  PXPL     PiXel PLacement 213  IR      PRESCRIBE start sequence 214  RCLT     Rotated CoLlaTion 216  RDMP     Received data DuMP 217  RES     RESet 219  RESL     select RESoLution 221  RGBL     control RGB Level 222  RGST     offset ReGiSTration 224  RPCS     Return to Previous Code Set 225  RPF     Return to Previous Font 226  RPG     Return to Previous Graphics state 227  RPP     Return to Previous Position 229  RPPL     Return to Previous PaLette 231  RPU     Return to Previous Unit 232  RTTX     RoTate TeXt 233  RTXT     print Right aligned TeXT 235  RVCD     ReceiVe Compressed raster Data 237  RVCL     ReceiVe CoLor raster data 238  RVRD     ReceiVe Raster Data 239  RWER D      Read Write External Resource  Delete data on external media   
234. t print correctly in the IBM     emu    lation  mode 1         INTL 2  2  SLM 1  STM 2      He      p       lvetica   14     fel sind eine  berraschung              EXIT             Diese Apfel sind eine   berraschung     INTL    181       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBD     JOB Deletion    132    Format   JOBD  mode   job id or mailbox id    password       Parameters  mode     mode of deletion     1   Deletes temporary jobs   2   Deletes permanent jobs   8   Deletes the jobs in the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox id  9   Deletes the virtual mailbox specified by mailbox id   15   Resets all virtual mailboxes to a clean state    job id or mailbox id     an integer or character string that specifies the job ID or mailbox ID   0   for modes 8  9  and 15 only  affects all the mailboxes   1 to 255   tray ID  specified by JOBS    Character string   job ID or alias of virtual mailbox  must be enclosed by single or  double quotation marks    password     Function    four digit number specified by VMPW to secure the mailbox    The JOBD command deletes the jobs stored in the hard disk  This command may be used    to make more free space in the hard disk by deleting unnecessary jobs     Modes 1 and 2 delete the temporary and permanent jobs  respectively  By giving a job ID     specified by the JOBS command   it deletes only the job having the matching job ID     Modes 8  9  and 15 are used for deletion of the jobs stacked in the virtual mailbox  Mode    8 deletes all jobs store
235. ted pages are delivered to the trays in the reverse order of tray  parameters  The printed pages are delivered first to the last specified tray until it becomes  full  when the last specified tray becomes full  then the pages are delivered to the second  to the last specified tray  and so on until the first specified tray becomes full  When the  first specified tray becomes full  the bulk tray receives the overflowed pages until it also  becomes full     When the bulk tray becomes full  the printing system pauses and displays a message  which urges the user to remove paper  By removing all the pages in the bulk tray and  pressing the ON LINE key  printing commences     If the tray parameters are omitted  all trays excluding the bulk tray are used   Upon receiving the MSTK command  the printer automatically performs a page feed     The MSTK 0  command is applicable only for the SO 6  This command cancels the  mailbox mode and delivers all pages in the bulk output tray                 IR  RES          COPY  EXIT   PAGE 1  2 copies  bottom tray   R  PAGE  EXIT   PAGE 2  2 copies  bottom tray   R  PAGE  EXIT                       MTYP    MTYP     select Media TYPe    Format  MTYP media type   Parameter  media type   1   Plain  2   Transparency  3   Preprinted  4   Label  5   Bond  6   Recycled  7   Vellum  8   Rough  9   Letterhead  10   Color  11   Prepunched  12   Envelope  13   Cardstock  14   Coated  15   Second side  16   Thick  21   Custom 1  22   Custom 2  23   Custom 3  2
236. ter is limited only by the size of the page  Negative values can be used to  obtain overlines     The minimum underline thickness is one dot  The maximum underline thickness is 127  dots  The default values include       Distance below baseline  7 dots    Thickness of underline  4 dots    One dot equals approximately 0 0083 cm or 0 0033 inches     The SULP command does not affect the underline character  _   which is an independent  character with ASCII code 95  hex 5F   If your word processing software writes  underlines by backing up and printing the underline character instead of using the  printing system   s automatic underline feature  the SULP command will control only  underlines printed by the U option in PRESCRIBE commands such as TEXT           RES  UNIT     SLS 0 8    SFNT  Helvetica Nr   12    TEXT  Default paramaters   E  U  TEXT       E             2   1    TEXT  heavier underlining         0    TEXT  and even   E    SULP   32   04                                                  TEXT  OVERLINING   E  U   TEXT    1     PAGE    EXIT        345       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Default parameters  heavier underlining  and even OVERLINING     346       TATR    TATR     apply Tray ATtributes    Format  TATR  source   thickness  print density  1   Parameters  Source  paper source   0   MP tray      main cassette  2   second cassette  thickness    thickness of paper     0   normal  normal   1   thick  2   thin    print density  print density   lighter 
237. ters  width    width of round box  height    height of round box  radius    radius of round box corners  Function    The PRBX command adds a round box path to the current path  This command close the  sub paths but does not stroke the path by itself  Therefore  STRK or FILL is required to  follow this command     The parameter value for the width  height and radius of the round box should be positive        208       File    Printout    PRBX    IR  RES  UNIT C    PD 0 125  NEWP    ZP 1  1    REX 11 7  1 4  0 5  STRE           dei   25s   SFNT  Helvetica Bd   24    TEXT  CAUTION  HOT SURFACE                    FU    U          PAT 5  NEWP   PMZP 1  4   PRBX 5  2 4  0 3  FILL        ZP 1 4  4 7    SFNT  Helvetica Nr   12    EXT  Barefoot Systems  Inc    1   EXT  4203 Charleston Avenue   1   EXT         Box 150   1    EXT  Edinburgh  CA 94039 1057                                 PAGE   EXIT           CAUTION  HOT SURFACE        209       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PRRC     in Path  at Relative position  draw aRC    210    Format    PRRC x coordinate  y coordinate  radius  start angle  end angle     Parameters    x coordinate  y coordinate   coordinates as measured from the current cursor position    radius   radius of arc    start angle   starting angle  measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis    end angle   ending angle  measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis    Function    The PRRC command first of all adds a line extending from the current position 
238. tes a new color palette using the ID which is assigned to the  currently active palette  Note that the currently active palette is deleted by this command     It is possible to add and change colors on this palette  However  the currently active  colors do not change even though a new palette is created with this command     The same colors as simple colors are defined for index numbers 0 through 7 when the  RGB color space is specified  The color assignments for these indices can be changed  using the ACLI command     Indexed by Pixel encoding assigns colors onto the palette  This is used for rendering text  and vector objects  Direct by Pixel encoding assigns colors directly to pixels  This is  used for bitmap images     Changing a color palette does not affect color print quality on output pages        File    Printout    CID       IR  RES    DAM    UNIT C    SFNT  Helvetica Bd   20     CPAL C  1  SPAL 1     CID 0  1  CMNT RGB Color Space used   ACLI 1  0  0  255     MZP 1  1  SCOL 1   TEXT  An RGB color palette is used              CID 3  1  CMNT L a b Color Space used   ACLI 2  100  75  0           MZP 1  2  SCOL 2   TEXT  An L a b color palette is used            PAGE   EXIT        An RGB color palette is used   An L a b color palette is used     51       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CIR     draw CIRcle    Format  CIR radius     Parameter   radius   radius of the circle   Function  In standard graphics mode  the CIR command draws a circle centered at the current  curs
239. th    325       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Line with 1 cm left margin and 10 cm width    Line with 1 cm left margin and 8 cm  width    Line with 1 cm left margin  and 6 cm width    Related Command  SRM    326       SRM    SRM     Set Right Margin    Format    SRM width     Parameter    width     Function    File    size of right margin    The SRM command sets the right margin  as measured from the left edge limit of the  paper in the unit value designated by the UNIT command     If an attempt is made to print beyond the right margin  the characters are printed on the  next line in the IBM and Epson emulation modes and discarded in the other emulations     The SPW  Set Page Width  command also sets the right margin  but it measures from the  left margin position     IR  RES  UNIT     SLM 1    CMNT Emulation mode is 1  IBM    SFNT  Univers MdCd   18  SLPI 4   SRM 11        EXIT     Line with 1 cm left margin and 11 cm right margin        SRM 9  EXIT           Line with 1 cm left margin and 9 cm right margin                   SRM 7  EXIT        Line with 1 cm left margin and 7 cm right margin                   PAGE  EXIT           327       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Printout    Line with 1 cm left margin and 11 cm right ma  rgin    Line with 1 cm left margin and 9 cm  right margin    Line with 1 cm left margin  and 7 cm right margin    Related Command    SPW    328       SRO    SRO     Set Raster Options    Format    SRO presentation mode    width  height   
240. th the barcode    reader BC 1     The JOBL 8  command outputs a list representing the usage status of virtual mailboxes     Example of VMB virtual mailbox usage status list output    j     R KYOCERA  VIRTUAL MAIL BOX LIST          oo    Tal    Regardless of whether mailboxes contain any data  information is displayed for  mailboxes which have been used at least once  The information displayed for each  mailbox is  the mailbox  Bin  number  the alias set for the mailbox  the number of jobs in  the mailbox  the number of pages  the size of jobs held in that mailbox only  and the size  of jobs entered in other mailboxes as well  A is displayed over the mailbox  number for virtual mailboxes which contain jobs  A Full   is displayed next to the job  size entry for virtual mailboxes containing jobs which caused an error during data is  written to the mailbox  An error log indicating failure is also printed when jobs within  such a mailbox are printed        JOBL    File  To print a permanent job list           JOBL 2  EXIT        135       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    JOBO     JOB Output    136    Format   JOBO mode    job id  or   mailbox id     password     Parameters  mode     0   normal  8   virtual mailbox    job id  mode 0      job ID or page ID    mailbox id  mode 8      mailbox ID from 1 to 255  or alias    password  mode 8 only      Function    password for the mailbox    The JOBO command retrieves a temporary or permanent job or the jobs saved in the  virtual mailbox an
241. the highest priority in the font selection process  Refer to the FSET  command page     The available symbol sets depend on the printing system model and the fonts  If the  specified symbol set does not exist  the symbol set remains unchanged     Files    IR  RES    SFNT  Helvetica   24    SLPI 3    CMNT Current symbol set is ISO 6  ASCII   EXT  QABCDEFG         CSET 5M  CMNT Changed to PS math    EXT  QABCDEFG     PAGE    EXIT                                Printout    Q ABCDEFG    ABXAE DT    67       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    CSTK     select Collator STacKer    68    Format    CSTK    Parameter    tray     Function                 tray         or CSTK 0     number from 1 to the maximum  bottom     The CSTK command is effective only when the optional sorter is installed to the printing  system  It instructs the printing system to deliver printed pages to the sorter in the  collator mode  Each tray specified receives all copies of one page  The copies of the first  page go to the first tray  the copies of the second page to the second tray  and so on  If the  tray parameter is omitted  the trays are used in order from top to bottom     The copy count must be selected with the COPY command  The maximum copy count is  the maximum capacity of the sorter trays  which varies from sorter model to model      Upon receiving the CSTK command  the printing system automatically performs a form    feed     The tray parameter of 0  CSTK 0   should be used only to deselect the collat
242. ther cases  Default value is 1 52cm  0 6 inches  180 dots   The unit of  measurement is determined by the UNIT command    Minimum value 0 254cm  0 1 inch  30 dots    Maximum value 27 9cm  11 inches  3300 dots     tall     Height of tall bars in barcode types that have bars in two different heights  Default values  are the same as that of the short height     bar1 2 3 4   Width of a bar   Minimum value 0 0085cm  0 0033 inches  1 dot   Maximum value 1 6933cm  0 6667 inches  200 dots               1 2 3 4     The width of a space   The minimum and maximum values are the same as that of the bar width     Function    The BARC command converts a string to a barcode and prints it  The specification of the  type  flag and string parameters is necessary  After printing  the cursor positions at the  upper left corner of the barcode     If a value not mentioned above is specified as the barcode type  12 EAN 13 will be  automatically selected     Specify the flag parameter to Y when printing the text under the printed barcode or N  when not printing the text  The text will be printed in the font currently selected for the  printing system  However  a font selection command can be written ahead of the BARC  command to print the text in an arbitrary font     Characters that can be converted    The length of the string varies depending on the type of barcode to use  Characters that  can be used for the most barcode type are described in the table below           FS 600 FS 7000 FS 9100 FS 95
243. this command provides a non printing area of 5 mm x 5 mm  independent of  emulation mode     File          SCSZ 260  300  M  EXIT        281       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SCU     Save Current Unit    Format    SCU     Parameter    Function    File    282    None    The SCU command instructs the printing system to save the current unit of  measurement  Saving the current unit can prove useful when a macro containing a UNIT  command changes the unit of measurement  The saved unit can be retrieved later using    the RPU  return to previous unit  command     The current unit can be saved up to eight times using a separate SCU command for each   RPU commands retrieve the unit of measurement in reverse order                                                                 IR           N8  0  RES    SENT  Univers MdaCd   9    UNIT Cs SCU    ZE 1 5  1 5    TEX  THE DAYS ON THE ISLAND  PART I    CRO TITLE   FSET 24V    UNIT I    ZP 4  3   CIR 2    RP  1 8  21025   TEXT  1   ENDM   CALL TITLE   CHAPTER 1  PROLOGUE    RPU    SLM 2    STM 13   FSET 12v   EXIT           island which    U     y long anticipated vacation started at Mallorca       SCU    Printout    THE DAYS ON THE ISLAND  PART I    CHAPTER 1  PROLOGUE       My long anticipated vacation started at Mallorca  island which    Related commands    SCF  SCP  UNIT    283       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SDP     Store Dash Pattern    284    Format    SDP pattern number  dashl  spacel  dash2  space2       dash10            
244. thout POSTNET  C  Business Reply  Penalty and Franked Mail with POSTNET  D  OCR Readable Mail without POSTNET    4  125 0123456789 0  42 80 All  ASCII characters 32   126    43 1 20 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ    44 3 32     0123456789 abcdetn  and spaces                        Length of the bars    For the UPC and EAN  JAN  barcode type  the length of the short and tall bars can be  adjusted  When adjusting the length of the tall or short bars  specify that of both tall and  short bars  If the length of only the tall or short bars is adjusted  the bars  length does not  change  It is recommended to use the dot for the unit of measurement in order to avoid  the translation error by the barcode reader  In the example below  the length of the short  bar is specified as 1 5cm and the tall bar as 1 7cm                       UNIT D  BARC 8  Y   123456   180  200  PAGE  EXIT     123456    Width and space of the bar    Itis possible to adjust the widths of the bars and space between the bars  When adjusting  these widths  specify all of the eight width and space parameters  Specify the bar 1 to bar  4 in the ascending order  The values can be specified between 1 and 200 dots     Idot     barl  lt  bar2  lt  bar3  lt  bar4  lt  200dots  1dotXspacel  lt            2  lt  space3  lt  space4  lt  200dots    It is recommended to use the dot for the unit of width in order to avoid the translation  error by the barcode reader  The example below specifies the width of the first bar
245. tion    File    Printout    number of data code word columns  ranges between 1 and 30 inclusive  Illegal values  make XBCP 5 ignored      The XBCP 5 command sets the number of data code word columns in the PDF417  barcode  There are also row indicator code words at each end of the row which are not  counted as data code words  XBCP 6 default provides default     Note that this command is not effective if XBCP 8 is issued  Precedence of XBCP modes  is  5  8  5256  5 8 lt 6     To set 30 columns of barcode     IR  RES    XBCP 5  30         1 5  1 5    XBAR Visit Sea World  the world famous San Diego Zoo  amp   Wild Animal Park  historic Old Town  Tijuana  Mexico    ission Bay  the downtown Gaslamp District and all  those great beaches  And  as the natives know  the end  of September is the best time of year  ENDB    EXIT                    Number of columns is set to 30     WIES SR RR PARS NH    e NU    Number of columns is normal     2       369       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 6     determine aspect ratio of vertical height    370    and horizontal width    Format  XBCP 6  height  width    Parameters   height width   parts of the aspect ratio of vertical height and horizontal width  ranging between 10  1   XBCP 6  10  1  and 1  10  XBCP 6  1  10    Function  The XBCP 6 command determines aspect ratio of vertical height and horizontal width of  the barcode  Illegal values default to 1  2  Default is 1  2   Note that this command is not effective if XBCP 4 and or 5 is 
246. to the  beginning of the arc which is centered at the coordinates relative to the current position   then adds the line and the arc to the current path     Coordinates and radius are measured in the units designated by the UNIT command  the  starting and ending angles are measured counterclockwise from the positive x axis  For  example  the following example draws an arc extending over the center of the arc     PRRC 1  1  0  180     180 0  Center    Whereas  the following command  having the reversed starting and ending angles  draws  the arc under the center of the arc        PRRC    PRRG    ly 180  07    Center  180 0    Negative values are acceptable for angle  For example  an angle of 315 degrees is the  same as    45 degrees     File    IR  RES   SPD 0 05   MZP 4 5  5   NEWP   PRRC  1  0  L   907 270   PRRC 1   2  1  0  180   PRRC 2  1  1   90  90   PRRC  1  2  1  180  0   STRE   PAGE    EXIT                 Printout    211       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PSRC     select Paper SouRCe    212    Format  PSRC mode   Parameter  mode   0   multi purpose tray  1   Cassette 1  2   Cassette 2  3   Cassette 3  4   Cassette 4  5   Cassette 5  6   Cassette 6  99   envelope feeder  100   automatic  Function    File    The PSRC command selects whether to feed paper from the cassette  multi purpose tray   cassettes of the paper feeders  or the envelope feeder  Each cassette of the paper feeder is  assigned a cassette number in the order from the top as 1 through 6     Mode 100 of
247. to the  new margin     When the left margin is moved to the right  the right margin does not change  But when  the left margin is moved toward the left  the right margin moves with it  keeping a  constant page width  To move the left margin to the left but leave the right margin in its  original position  you must add an SRM command after the SLM command to restore the  original right margin     File          RES  UNIT C  FONT 2   SFNT  TimesNewRoman    SLM 1    EXIT   Location of 1 cm left margin                      SLM 2  EXIT   Location of 2 cm left margin             SLM 3  EXIT   Location of 3 cm left margin       IR  PAGE  EXIT                 SLM    Printout       Location of 1 cm left margin  Location of 2 cm left margin    Location of 3 cm left margin       307       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SLPI     Set Lines Per Inch    308    Format    SLPI number     Parameter    number   Number of lines per inch    Function    The SLPI command sets the number of lines per inch  even if the UNIT command  designates a non inch unit      File          RES  STM 2   SFNT  Helvetica    EXIT   These lines have th  default spacing of  six lines per inch   IR  SLPI 2  EXIT   These lines ar  spaced at two lines  per inch   IR  PAGE  EXIT                                   Printout    These lines have the  default spacing of  six lines per inch     These lines are    spaced at two lines    per inch     Related Command    SLS       SLPP    SLPP     Set Lines Per Page    Format    SLPP
248. tter m  or character string that specifies the parameter for the print option  as indicated in the table below                                              print  Function Parameter Effective to   option  0 Copy count 1 to 999  1 Printing barcode 0   first page only  1   whole page  2   disabled  2 Duplex printing 0   off JOBO  1   long edge binding  2   short edge binding  3 Destination stack 1   face down JOBO  2   face up  3   finisher tray  4 Stapling 0   off JOBO  1   bottom left  angled  2   top left  automatic angled or upright  3   two centered  Barcode position 0 to 7 or 128 to 135  printing page ID s   6 Staple count M or m   staples the maximum number of  sheets  For example  20 sheets for models DF   30 31   0   does not staple jobs that exceed the maxi   mum number of sheets        staple only the sheets that exceed the  maximum number of sheets   2 to 20   staples the number of specified  sheets   7 Center stitch 0   off  1   center stitch and stapling  8 Punching 0   off  1   main position  2   alternate position  9 Transparency separator 0   off  1   blank separator  2   duplicated separator  10 Source for transparency number representing the paper source  tray   separator  11 Rotated collation 0   off  1         12 Thumbnailing number of pages printed per sheet  1  2  4  6     9  or 16          Function    Files    JOBP          print  Function Parameter Effective to   option  13 Booklet 0   off    1   longitudinal feeding  left binding  2   longitudinal feed
249. uing page begins on the back side of the current sheet  if the current page was printed on the front side  or on the back side of the next sheet if  the current page was printed on the back side     85       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    86    File    Printout    The following example selects the duplex mode with short edge binding  a portrait page  orientation which results in text printing on both sides of the page             R  CMNT Initiates a PRESCRIBE command sequence  RES   CMNT Causes a page break and resets parameters   DUPX 2   CMNT Selects duplex mode  short edge binding   SPO P    C  S                 NT Selects portrait orientation   TAK 1   NT Select face down delivery   EXIT   This text prints right side up on the front side of the page   R  DXPG 0    CMNT Ends current page  front side of the paper                                          This text prints upside down on the reverse side of the page   R  RES  EXIT              This text points right side up on the front side of the page          DZP     Draw to Zero relative Position    Format    DZP x coordinate  y coordinate      Parameters    x coordinate     distance from the left edge limit of paper    y coordinate     distance from the top edge limit of paper    Function    DZP    The DZP command draws a line from the current cursor position to a position specified    relative to the top and left edge limits of the paper     The thickness of the line is designated by the SPD  set pen diameter  command  T
250. unction    File 1    x and y coordinates that represent the positions of the divided barcodes measured from  the current cursor position    The multiple PDF417 symbol from one large data can be positioned at the specified  locations using the XBCP 19 command  X    Y  is the relative location of second PDF  symbol to the first symbol        Y   for third  and so on as measured from the current  coordinate  like the MRP command described on the printing system s manual   The  remaining pairs of positioning parameters are ignored if there are no more PDF symbol  to print     The relative location parameters  X  and Y  can not define the location beyond first  page  The positioning command such as MZP and ENDB should be used to specify the  macro PDF location if there are data beyond first page  PDF symbol will be positioned a  half inch below the previous PDF symbol if there are no positioning parameter exist or  insufficient number of positioning parameters exist     The combination with multiple number of ENDB command allows to print multiple  number of macro PDF on multiple pages  Note RES  XBCPO  and XBAR command will  delete the remaining macro PDF data if all data has not been printed  Therefore  the page  eject should not be done by RES command     In Macro PDF mode  data such as large as 3000 bytes print 3 90 column by 30 row PDF  symbols at specified locations specified by XBCP 19  In the file below  the second line  XBCP 17 activates Macro PDF mode and specifies Qualit
251. und join  4   Notched join  Function    The SLJN command determines how two connected lines in a path are joined  The  default join is beveled  1      Beveled join ends the lines with butt caps  Refer to the SCAP command  and fills the  larger angle between the lines with a triangle  Mitered join extends the edges of the lines  until they touch  The current miter limit value affects this join type  Refer to SMLT  command on page 312   Round join connects lines with a circular join noted by a  diameter equal to the width of the lines  Notched join enables the lines to overlap     Beveled join Mitered join Round join Notched join                   File    Printout             SLJN          IR  RES  UNIT C    NEWP    SPD  45    SCAP 3    CMNT Round capped at the upper left corner   SLJN 3    CMNT Round joined at other corners    PMZP 5  16 5             3  0   07   3   23  00  0   3    STRK    NEWP    SCAP 1    CMNT Square capped at the upper left corner   SLJN 2    CMNT Mitered joined at other corners    PMZP 11  16 5    PDRP  3   05  05   35     3        10 83    STRK    PAGE    EXIT           305       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SLM     Set Left Margin    306    Format    SLM distance     Parameter    distance     size of left margin    Function    The SLM command sets the left margin  as measured from the left edge limit of the  paper in the unit value designated by the UNIT command     If the margin is moved to the right of the current cursor position  the cursor moves 
252. use of  the Software and Typefaces     You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces  except that you may make one backup copy  You agree  that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original     This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces  unless sooner terminated  This License  may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not rem   edied within thirty  30  days after notice from Monotype Imaging  When this License expires or is terminated  you shall  either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as  requested     You agree that you will not modify  alter  disassemble  decrypt  reverse engineer or decompile the Software     Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety  90  days after delivery  the Software will perform in accordance with Mono   type Imaging published specifications  and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship  Mono   type Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs  errors and omissions     THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES  EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED  INCLUDING WARRANTIES  OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY  ARE EXCLUDED     Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is  repair or replacement of defective part
253. uting this command  will close current sub paths     An error will result and the command has no effect if the bounding box is specified as a  straight line or a point        Current cursor position  x start  y start      x end  y end     Bounding box        x diagonal  y diagonal     File    R   ES   NIET  C7        I             ZP 0  0           2  3    NEWP    PMZP 0  0    PELP 2  3  2  0  0  0  N   STRK        ZP 5  5    BOX 2   3    NEWP    PMZP 5  5    PELP 2   3  2  0  0  0  N   STRK        ZP 10  5    BOX  2   3   NEWP    PMZP 10  5    PELP  2   3   2  0  0  0  N   STRK        ZP  15  0    BOX  2  3    NEWP    PMZP 15 0    PELP  2  3   2  0  0  0  N   STRK        RES   EXIT        PELP    197       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    PIE     draw PIE chart    198       Format   PIE radius  starting angle  slice size        Parameters  radius     radius of the pie chart    starting angle     slice size     Function    File    position of the first slice    relative sizes of the slices    The PIE command is a standard mode graphics command which draws a pie chart  centered at the current cursor position  The sizes of the slices may be specified using any  convenient non negative integers   PIE commands are ignored if they contain negative  slices  or slices with decimal fractions   The sum of the slice sizes should not exceed  9999  The total length of the command must not exceed 255 characters     The printer automatically converts the slice sizes to angles totaling 360 de
254. utput tray of the option mailbox 4  51   face down output tray of the option mailbox 5  52   face up output tray of the option mailbox 5  61   face down output tray of the option mailbox 6  62   face up output tray of the option mailbox 6  71   face down output tray of the option mailbox 7  72   face up output tray of the option mailbox 7  Function    The OTRY command instructs the printing system to deliver pages to the corresponding  output stack of the printing system or the option stacker  The selected tray remains in  effect until changed by another OTRY command  The default value is 1  the printing  system s face down tray     If an optional device such as a stacker  a document finisher  or a sorter is installed  the  tray value 2 instructs the printing system to deliver printed pages to its face up tray  the  value 3 delivers the pages to its face down tray  The tray values of 5  7  11  12  13  14   21  22  31  32  41  42  51  52  61  62  71  and 72 are valid for certain copiers installed  with the applicable option device     The OTRY command should be placed at the top of a file or program        File    AGE 1       OTRY             OTRY 2  EXIT        2  2     y 289  D       E pd          PAGE 3  But on          PAGE  EXIT     P  On printers with only one paper tray this file will be  delivered face down as usual  page 1 first    IR  PAGE  EXIT           next  and so on  stacking in the correct order                 printers with two paper trays this file will be   
255. vel   Parameter  level   error correction level  integer from 0 to 8  Function  The XBCP 3 command sets the error correction level by predetermined values  An  illegal value defaults to 0  Note that the execution of XBCP 3 overrides the setting of  XBCP 2 and remains valid until RES  reset  or XBCP 0   File  To sets the error correction level to level 4   IR  RES   XBCP 3  4   XBAR Error correction can also be set by level ENDB   EXIT        367       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    XBCP 4     set data code word rows    Format  XBCP 4  number   Parameter  number   number of data code word rows  ranging from 3 to 90  Function    The XBCP 4 command sets the number of data code word rows in the PDFA17 barcode   Illegal values make XBCP 4 ignored  XBCP 6 default provides default     Note that this command is not effective if XBCP 8 is issued  Precedence of XBCP modes  is  4  8  4 gt 6  4 8 lt  6     File  To set 20 rows of barcode           RES    XBCP 4  20          1 5  1 5    XBAR  Visit Sea World  the world famous San Diego Zoo  amp   Wild Animal Park  historic Old Town  Tijuana  Mexico    ission Bay  the downtown Gaslamp District and all  those great beaches  And  as the natives know  the end  of September is the best time of year  ENDB    EXIT                    Printout    ARE AT a    s     Y   Number of rows is set to 20     Number of rows is normal        368       XBCP 5    XBCP 5     set data code word columns    Format    XBCP 5  number     Parameter    number     Func
256. xecuted     Originally the command recognition character is the capital letter R within the  PRESCRIBE start sequence of  R      One reason for changing the command recognition character is to print listings of files or  programs containing PRESCRIBE commands  If the command recognition character is  not changed  then instead of printing the PRESCRIBE commands  the printing system  will execute them     File                            IR  RES  UNIT C    GPAT  7  BLK 1  1  BOX 1  1  E   GPAT  5  BLK 1 3  1 3  BOX 1 3  1 3  E   GPAT  3  BLK 1 6  1 6  BOX 1 6  1 6  E   CMNT Now list the above commands    SCRC L    EXIT    IR  RES  UNIT C    GPAT 7  BLK 1  1  BOX 1  1  E   GPAT  5  BLK 1 3  1 3  BOX 1 3  1 3  E   GPAT 3  BLK 1 6  1 6  BOX 1 6  1 6  E              PAGE  EXIT   IL  RES  EXIT                       278       SCRC    Printout       IR  RES  UNIT C     GPAT  7  BLK 1  1  BOX 1  1  E   GPAT  5  BLK 1 3  1 3  BOX 1 3  1 3  E   GPAT  3  BLK 1 6  1 6  BOX 1 6  1 6  E     PAGE  EXIT     279       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    SCS     Set Character Spacing    280    Format    SCS distance     Parameter    distance   character to character spacing  or 0    Function    The SCS command sets the distance from the beginning of one character to the  beginning of the next character     When a proportionally spaced font is used and the font mode  FTMD  is 0 to 3 or 8 to  11  SCS 0  zero  must be specified to obtain the innate spacing of each character  A non   Zero specification re
257. ySt for file id  The third line  MZP command positions the first barcode at 1 inch each from the left and right paper  edge limits  The fourth line XBCP 19 moves the cursor 1 inch from the left and 2 inches  below the point where the first barcode started and prints the second barcode  then  moves the cursor 1 inch from the left and 2 inches below the point where the second  barcode started and prints the third barcode      IR  RES    XBCP 17  QualitySt     MZP 1  1    XBGP 19 15 2 15 25   XBAR  large data such as 3000 bytes  ENDB   EXIT                 Printout 1       File 2       XBCP 19    To print 4 30 column by 20 row PDF symbols at specified locations in Macro PDF  mode  In example below  the first line XBCP command resets all XBCP parameters to  the defaults and selects the barcode type for PDF417  though it is the only type currently  available   the second line XBCP sets the number of rows in the barcode to 20  rows    the third line XBCP sets the number of data codeword in the barcode to 30  codewords    Note that with the number of rows and codewords of 20 and 30 respectively  the data the  XBAR encodes are split into 4 barcodes which can be positioned separately at different  coordinates as specified by the seventh line XBCP command             XBC  XBC  XBC  XBC  ZP  XBC  XBA       RES    P  Orl    P 4 20    P 5 30    P 17  TrnOvr9    0 57 0355          R  large data such as 3000 bytes       EXIT     P 19 0 5 1 0 5 5 1  0 5 15 0 5  1        ENDB     387       PR
258. ype of data to be deleted    1   Font data   2   Printable data   16   Macro data   112   File data   128   API data  downloadable program     partition name     Function    Name of partition from which data is deleted    The RWER D command deletes data on any external media whether it is a memory card  or the hard disk  This command has no effect if the media has been write protected using  KPDL or PJL     The partition name may be a maximum of 15 printable ASCII characters  20H through           upper and lower case letters are regarded distinct  A partition name may not have  leading spaces  and in the command  the partition name must be enclosed in single or  double quotation marks     A partition list is not automatically printed when deleting data on external media  even  though the automatic printing of partition information was enabled  by the RWER I  command     See page 243      A command error results and the command has no effect if parameters other than the  above are used     This command causes a page break     241       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWER F      Read Write External Resource     242    Format external media    Format    RWER F  medium        Parameter    medium     0   hard disk  A   memory card    Function    The RWER F command formats any external media whether it is a memory card or the  hard disk  The hard disk is physically formatted when it is specified  This command has  no effect if the media has been write protected using KPDL or PJL  
259. ys explicitly terminate the end of font data using WRED    The five bytes  represented by WRED  are not counted as part of the font data length           Since value  style  weight and type face represent font attributes they have an affect  during font selection  Although they may be omitted  we recommend that all parameters  be used to define font selection information     In order to delete a Japanese TrueType font defined using this command  it is necessary  to delete two separate file names using          D    xxxxxx  and          D      xXxxxx inf  Up to 512 fonts may be registered on a single memory card or up to  4096 on a single hard disk  Note carefully that registration beyond this limit will result in  data being interpreted as unneeded    Only 28 characters are valid for Japanese TrueType font names when font type   2 is  specified because the system automatically appends  P  for proportional fonts and       for fixed pitch fonts           A command error will result and the command has no effect if any of the parameters are  outside the given range  This command is ignored if even one parameter error occurs     The font data following the semicolon for this command must match the length given by  length  An error will result and the font data will not be defined if the data length is  shorter than specified     247       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    RWER T      Read Write External Resource  set    248    Terminate string       Format  RWER          terminator 
260. ze and  numbers appear alongside the font name  These fonts are lost when power is  switched off     Items and values on the status page may vary among the printing system s firmware ver   sions     Depending on the parameters  different information may be printed on the status page    There are two types of status pages  one intended for the end user  and one intended for  service personnel   Also  the printing system can print the status page in different  languages in accordance with the language setting of the printing system s control panel   The default is the English status page     335       PRESCRIBE Command Reference    Sample Status Page    User status page          KYOCERA  Ec  sms  FS 1800  Page Printer    STATUS PAGE     0A00 A002  C1  30 00 MXIJ 00  Firmware version  82 00 01  Released  07 Aug 2001             MP Tr   Ad Plain Standard memory 8192 KB        Cassette 1      Plain Option memory     Slot Empty  Ecoprint mode OFF 2 Ert   Buzzer control ON Total      8192  Host buffer size 200 KB User available 3557 KB  Sleep timer 15 Minutes RAM disk OFF  FF time out 30 Seconds Write protect       Total 0 KB  E User available 0 KB              Resolution 300 DPI  Copies H  Total page 2138 Hard disk drive NO  5     Option ROM NO         card NO      ork                Line printer  IBM Proprinter  Diablo 630             L0 850  PCL 6   KPDL2             Service status page                PAGE PRINTER STATUS PAGE                                                  Inter
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Lithium battery balance charger CB86-PLUS User  V7 Replacement Battery for selected Dell Notebooks  Covert Channels Evaluation Framework Design and Implementation  BENUTZERHANDBUCH - plastikkartendrucker.at  MANUAL DO UTILIZADOR  User Manual - Wireless LAN-Shenzhen Hwnet Times Tech.  atd-3306 4pc cooling system vacuum purge & refill  MANUAL DE UTILIZAÇÃO DO AMBIENTE EAD  Installation Manual      Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file